Top Banner
Toc A-1 IM 33Q06C20-01E CONTENTS 13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00 IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition CS 1000/CS 3000 Field Control Stations PART-A Field Control Station A1. Control Station Overview ..................................................................... A1-1 A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part ..................................... A2-1 A2.1 Configuration of PFCS/SFCS and Name of Each Part ................................ A2-2 A2.2 Configuration of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS and Name of Each Part ... A2-3 A2.3 Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet and Name of Each Part ......... A2-4 A2.4 Configuration of Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS and Name of Each Part .. A2-8 A2.5 Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet and Name of Each Part ........ A2-9 A2.6 Configuration of FFCS and Name of Each Part ......................................... A2-13 A3. Installation ............................................................................................ A3-1 A3.1 Mounting a Rack Mountable Type Devices .................................................. A3-2 A3.1.1 Attaching the Brackets on a Nest .................................................... A3-5 A3.1.2 Installation of Rack Mountable Device ............................................ A3-7 A3.2 Installing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS (with Cabinet) ............................... A3-10 A3.2.1 Maintenance Area ........................................................................ A3-11 A4. Cable Connections ............................................................................... A4-1 A4.1 Power Supply Wiring ..................................................................................... A4-2 A4.1.1 Wiring of Cabinet Internal Power Cables ......................................... A4-3 A4.1.2 Power Calble Wiring of FFCS .......................................................... A4-4 A4.2 Grounding ..................................................................................................... A4-6 A4.2.1 Grounding of PFCD/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS ......... A4-7 A4.2.2 Grounding of FFCS ......................................................................... A4-8 A4.3 Connecting the Bus Cables .......................................................................... A4-9 A4.3.1 Connecting the PFCS/SFCS Bus Cable ........................................ A4-10 A4.3.2 Connecting the Bus Cables to LFCS2/LFCS ................................. A4-15 A4.3.3 Connecting the Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCS ................................ A4-35 A4.3.4 Connecting Bus Cables to FFCS .................................................. A4-42 A4.4 V net Conversion ......................................................................................... A4-49 A4.5 Connecting a Cable to Contact Output ...................................................... A4-50 A5. Operations and Setups ......................................................................... A5-1 A5.1 Setting Up Units ............................................................................................ A5-2 A5.2 Turing On/Off the Power ............................................................................... A5-5
296
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: 6C2001

Toc A-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

CONTENTS

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition

CS 1000/CS 3000Field Control Stations

PART-A Field Control StationA1. Control Station Overview ..................................................................... A1-1

A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part ..................................... A2-1A2.1 Configuration of PFCS/SFCS and Name of Each Part ................................ A2-2

A2.2 Configuration of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS and Name of Each Part ... A2-3

A2.3 Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet and Name of Each Part ......... A2-4

A2.4 Configuration of Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS and Name of Each Part .. A2-8

A2.5 Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet and Name of Each Part ........ A2-9

A2.6 Configuration of FFCS and Name of Each Part ......................................... A2-13

A3. Installation ............................................................................................ A3-1A3.1 Mounting a Rack Mountable Type Devices .................................................. A3-2

A3.1.1 Attaching the Brackets on a Nest .................................................... A3-5

A3.1.2 Installation of Rack Mountable Device ............................................ A3-7

A3.2 Installing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS (with Cabinet) ............................... A3-10

A3.2.1 Maintenance Area ........................................................................ A3-11

A4. Cable Connections ............................................................................... A4-1A4.1 Power Supply Wiring ..................................................................................... A4-2

A4.1.1 Wiring of Cabinet Internal Power Cables ......................................... A4-3

A4.1.2 Power Calble Wiring of FFCS .......................................................... A4-4

A4.2 Grounding ..................................................................................................... A4-6

A4.2.1 Grounding of PFCD/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS ......... A4-7

A4.2.2 Grounding of FFCS......................................................................... A4-8

A4.3 Connecting the Bus Cables .......................................................................... A4-9

A4.3.1 Connecting the PFCS/SFCS Bus Cable ........................................ A4-10

A4.3.2 Connecting the Bus Cables to LFCS2/LFCS ................................. A4-15

A4.3.3 Connecting the Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCS ................................ A4-35

A4.3.4 Connecting Bus Cables to FFCS .................................................. A4-42

A4.4 V net Conversion ......................................................................................... A4-49

A4.5 Connecting a Cable to Contact Output ...................................................... A4-50

A5. Operations and Setups......................................................................... A5-1A5.1 Setting Up Units ............................................................................................ A5-2

A5.2 Turing On/Off the Power ............................................................................... A5-5

Page 2: 6C2001

IM 33Q06C20-01E

Toc A-2

10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00

A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS ............................................................. A6-1A6.1 Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCS ........................................................ A6-2

A6.1.1 Power Distribution Board of PFCS/SFCS ........................................ A6-3

A6.1.2 Power Supply Unit of PFCS/SFCS .................................................. A6-4

A6.1.3 Battery Unit of PFCS/SFCS ............................................................ A6-5

A6.1.4 Processor Card of PFCS/SFCS ...................................................... A6-6

A6.1.5 Control Bus Coupler Unit .............................................................. A6-10

A6.2 Functions of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ............................. A6-11

A6.2.1 Power Distribution Board of Rack MountableLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........................................................ A6-12

A6.2.2 Power Distribution Boards ofLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet .................................... A6-13

A6.2.3 RIO Bus Distribution Unit .............................................................. A6-18

A6.2.4 Power Unit in FCU ........................................................................ A6-19

A6.2.5 Battery Unit in FCU ....................................................................... A6-20

A6.2.6 Processor card in FCU.................................................................. A6-21

A6.2.7 RIO Bus Interface Card ................................................................. A6-25

A6.2.8 ESB Bus Interface Card ................................................................ A6-26

A6.2.9 V net Coupler Unit ........................................................................ A6-27

A6.2.10 RIO Bus Coupler Unit ................................................................... A6-29

A6.2.11 ESB Bus Coupler Unit ................................................................... A6-30

A6.2.12 External Interface Unit of Rack MountableLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........................................................ A6-31

A6.2.13 External Interface Unit ofLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet .................................... A6-32

A6.2.14 Contact Output Unit ...................................................................... A6-33

A6.2.15 Fan Units ...................................................................................... A6-34

A6.2.16 ESB Bus Interface Master Module (with SOE Interface) ................ A6-35

A6.2.17 IRIG-B Coupler ............................................................................. A6-39

A6.3 Configuration and Functions of Each Unit in FFCS .................................. A6-40

A6.3.1 External Interface Unit .................................................................. A6-41

A6.3.2 Power Supply Module ................................................................... A6-42

A6.3.3 Processor Module ......................................................................... A6-43

A6.3.4 V net Coupler Unit ........................................................................ A6-49

A6.3.5 ESB Bus Coupler Module ............................................................. A6-50

A6.3.6 ESB Bus Interface Module (SB401) .............................................. A6-51

A6.3.7 ER Bus Interface Master Module (EB401) ..................................... A6-53

A6.3.8 ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501) ....................................... A6-54

A7. Maintenance of FCS ............................................................................. A7-1A7.1 Precautions for Maintenance ....................................................................... A7-2

A7.1.1 Precautions for Static Electricity ...................................................... A7-3

Page 3: 6C2001

Toc A-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

A7.2 Daily Maintenance......................................................................................... A7-4

A7.2.1 Inspection Using FCS Status Display Window ................................ A7-5

A7.2.2 Check of Status Indication Lamps : PFCS/SFCS ............................ A7-6

A7.2.3 Check of Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ... A7-8

A7.2.4 Inspection by FFCS Status Display Window ................................. A7-10

A7.2.5 Inspection by FFCS Status Display LEDs ..................................... A7-11

A7.3 Replacing PFCS/SFCS Parts ...................................................................... A7-12

A7.3.1 Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure ................................. A7-13

A7.3.2 Processor Card Replacement Procedure ...................................... A7-15

A7.3.3 Control Bus Coupler Unit Replacement Procedure ....................... A7-17

A7.3.4 Battery Unit Replacement Procedure ............................................ A7-19

A7.3.5 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having DefinedLife Spans) ................................................................................... A7-22

A7.4 Replacing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS Parts ............................................ A7-23

A7.4.1 Common Procedure for Replacing Cards and Units ...................... A7-24

A7.4.2 Replacing Cards or Units in Non-Redundant LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS ............................................................................... A7-25

A7.4.3 Replacing Cards or Units in Duplexed LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS ............................................................................... A7-27

A7.4.4 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having DefinedLife Spans) ................................................................................... A7-30

A7.5 Replacing FFCS Parts ................................................................................. A7-42

A7.5.1 Replacing Common Modules ........................................................ A7-43

A7.5.2 Exchange Node ............................................................................ A7-53

A7.5.3 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having DefinedLife Spans) ................................................................................... A7-56

A7.5.4 How to Replace Parts ................................................................... A7-57

Customer Maintenance Parts List (PFCS/SFCS) ............... CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS10/AFG10) ........... CMPL 33Q06C20-31E

Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS20/AFG20) ........... CMPL 33Q06C21-31E

Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS30/AFG30) ........... CMPL 33Q06N10-31E

Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS40/AFG40) ........... CMPL 33Q06N20-31E

Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFF50) ........................ CMPL 33Q06N30-31E

Page 4: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 5: 6C2001

Toc B-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

CONTENTS

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition

CS 1000/CS 3000Field Control Stations

PART-B CabinetsB1. Cabinet .................................................................................................. B1-1

B2. *** This section is blank. *** .................................................................. B2-1

B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41 .................................................................. B3-1B3.1 Installation of Node Inside ACB21/ACB41 ................................................... B3-2

B3.2 Installation and Wiring for ACB21/ACB41 .................................................... B3-3

B3.2.1 ACB21/ACB41 Maintenance Area .................................................. B3-4

B3.2.2 Installing an ACB21/ACB41 ............................................................ B3-5

B3.2.3 Wiring for ACB21/ACB41 ................................................................ B3-6

Customer Maintenance Parts List(Terminal Boards/Blocks, Relay Boards) ..................CMPL 33Y06K50-31E

Customer Maintenance Parts List (ACB41) ....................... CMPL 33Q06P10-31E

Page 6: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 7: 6C2001

<A1. Control Station Overview> A1-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A1. Control Station OverviewIn the standard configuration, the main components of the PFCS/SFCS are two I/Omodule nests containing I/O modules for conversion of signals to and from the field.By adding an I/O expansion rack, a PFCS/SFCS can contain a total of five I/O modulenests.

There are two types of LFCS2/LFCS: the model installed in a cabinet and a rackmountable model. An LFCS2/LFCS is composed of nodes, I/O units, and the RIObus.

There are two types of KFCS2/KFCS: the model installed in a cabinet and a rackmountable model. An KFCS2/KFCS is composed of “Local Nodes”, “RemoteNodes”, and the ESB bus (Extended SB bus).

FFCS may be configured as a compact type field control unit with 3 I/O nodes.

SEE ALSO

For the details of hardware specifications, refer to General Specifications shown below.

• CENTUM CS 1000

PFCS/PFCD Field Control Station, Duplexed Field Control Station (GS 33S06C10-31E)

• CENTUM CS 3000

PFCS/PFCD Field Control Station, Duplexed Field Control Station (compact type)

(GS 33Q06C30-31E)

AFS10S, AFS10D, AFG10S, AFG10D

Field Control Unit (for RIO, 19” rack-mountable type)

Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, 19” rack-mountable type) (GS 33Q06C20-31E)

AFS20S, AFS20D, AFG20S, AFG20D

Field Control Unit (for RIO, with cabinet)

Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, with cabinet) (GS 33Q06C21-31E)

AFS30S, AFS30D, AFG30S, AFG30D

Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type)

Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type) (GS 33Q06N10-31E)

AFS40S, AFS40D, AFG40S, AFG40D

Field Control Unit (for FIO, with cabinet)

Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, with cabinet) (GS 33Q06N20-31E)

AFF50S, AFF50D

Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type)

Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type) (GS 33Q06N05-31E)

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 8: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 9: 6C2001

<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of EachPartThe following describes the configuration of a PFCS, SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and FFCS the name of each part.

In addition, the control bus is referred to represent both V net and VL net.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 10: 6C2001

A2-2<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A2.1 Configuration of PFCS/SFCS and Name of EachPartThe figure below shows the maximum configuration of a PFCS/SFCS with an I/Oexpansion rack. The units composing a PFCS/SFCS are listed in the table below thefigure.

In PFCS/SFCS (non-redundant configuration), when each component requires onlyone unit, the units of the components should be installed on the left and the dummyplates should be put on the right.

■ Name of Each Part : PFCS/SFCS

A020101E.EPS

I/O modules

Power distribution board

Power supply units

Processor cards

Contact output unit

Battery units

Control bus coupler units Branch plugBranch plug

I/O Expansion rack

Bare nest

Figure Configuration and Name of Each Part : PFCS/SFCS

Table Units Composing and Model Name : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £

Unit or Card Name Single Configuration Duplexed Configuration

Power supply unit (100-120 V AC)

Power supply unit (220-240 V AC)

Power supply unit (24 V DC)

Processor card (standard (*1))

Processor card (enhanced (*1), compact type)

Battery unit

Control bus coupler unit

PW701

PW702

PW704

CP701

CP703

S9766UK

AIP521

1 or 2ps

1 or 2ps

1 or 2ps

1

1

1

1 or 2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

A020102E.EPS

PW701

PW702

PW704

CP701

CP703

S9766UK

AIP521

Branch plug (for VL net or V net 10BASE-2 cable) S9764UK 1 or 2ps 2psS9764UK

Branch plug (for V net 10BASE-5 cable) S9628UK 2ps 2psS9628UK

Note *1 : ¡ For CS 1000, only standard type and enhanced type can be applied.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 11: 6C2001

<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A2.2 Configuration of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCSand Name of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a rack mountable duplexed LFCS2/LFCS. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right of the nestand dummy plate on the left.

■ Name of Each Part : LFCS2/LFCS £

A020201E.EPS

Power supply unitsRIO bus interface cardsProcessor cards

Nest

Battery unit

RIO bus coupler units

Fan units Air filter Power supply terminals

Power distribution board

External interface unit

Battery unit

V net coupler unit

Figure Configuration of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS and Name of Each Part : LFCS2/LFCS £

The type and number of the card to be installed in rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS vary withmodel name and specification code of LFCS2/LFCS.

SEE ALSO

For the units and cards composing an LFCS2/LFCS, see the following:

The table in Section A2.3, “Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinets and Name of Each Part”

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 12: 6C2001

A2-4<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A2.3 Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet andName of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS with cabinet.

For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right half of the nest anddummy plates on the left half.

■ Name of Each Part : LFCS2/LFCS £

A020301E.EPS

Front Side Rear

FCU

Power distribution boards for nests

RIO bus distribution unit RIO bus

distribution unit

Main power distribution board

Power distribution boards for nodes

FCU

Figure Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 13: 6C2001

<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-5

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

The figure below shows the configuration of the FCU of a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS with acabinet. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right of the nest anddummy plate on the left.

A020302E.EPS

Power supply unitsRIO bus interface cardsProcessor cards

Battery unit

RIO bus coupler units

Fan units

External interface unit

Battery unit

Figure Configuration of FCU : LFCS2/LFCS £

The models and numbers of cards installed in the FCU in an LFCS2/LFCS with cabinetdiffer depending on the model and suffix code of the LFCS2/LFCS as shown in the tablebelow.

Table Cards and Unit Name and Model : LFCS2/LFCS £

Model Field Control UnitDuplexed Field

Control Unit

Card/UnitAFS10S, AFS20SAFG10S, AFG20S

AFS10D, AFS20DAFG10D, AFG20D

Power supply unit (100-120 V AC)

Power supply unit (220-240 V AC)

Power supply unit (24 V DC)

Processor card

RIO bus interface card

V net coupler unit

RIO bus coupler unit

PW301

PW302

PW304

CP345

RB301

AIP501

AIP511

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

2ps

PW301

PW302

PW304

CP345

RB301

AIP502

AIP512

A020303E.EPS

1

1

1

1

1

2ps

1 or 2ps

Page 14: 6C2001

A2-6<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

■ Internal Power Distribution : LFCS2/LFCS £

● Single Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £

A020304E.EPS

CN1 (NIU1)

CN2 (NIU2)

CN3 (NIU3)

L N L N

CN1 (NIU1)

CN2 (NIU2)

CN3 (NIU3)

CN1 (FCU)

CN2 (NIU1)

CN3 (NIU2)

CN4 (NIU3)

L N

CN1 (FCU)

CN2 (NIU1)

CN3 (NIU2)

CN4 (NIU3)

L N

L

N1

L

N2

L

N3

The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers.

LFCS2/LFCS Front LFCS2/LFCS Rear

Rear RightRear Left

Front RightFront Left

TM2 AC OUT

Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Single Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £

Page 15: 6C2001

<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-7

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

● Dual Lines of Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £

A020305E.EPS

CN1 (NIU1)

CN2 (NIU2)

CN3 (NIU3)

L N L N

CN1 (NIU1)

CN2 (NIU2)

CN3 (NIU3)

CN1 (FCU)

CN2 (NIU1)

CN3 (NIU2)

CN4 (NIU3)

L N

CN1 (FCU)

CN2 (NIU1)

CN3 (NIU2)

CN4 (NIU3)

L N

TM2 AC OUT

L

N1

L

N2

L

N3

TM2 AC OUT

L

N1

L

N2

L

N3

The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers. The marks, “R” and “L”, indicate the right side from the front, and the left side from the front, respectively.

LFCS2/LFCS Front LFCS2/LFCS Rear

Rear RightRear Left

Front RightFront Left

Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Dual Lines of Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £

Page 16: 6C2001

A2-8<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A2.4 Configuration of Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCSand Name of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a rack mountable duplexed KFCS2/KFCS. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right half of thenest and dummy plates on the left half.

■ Name of Each Part : KFCS2/KFCS £

A020401E.EPS

Power supply unitsESB bus interface cardsProcessor cards

Battery unit

ESB bus coupler units

Fan units Air filter Power supply terminals

Power distribution board

External interface unit

Battery unit

V net coupler unit

Nest

Figure Configuration of Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS and Name of Each Part : KFCS2/KFCS£

The type and number of the card to be installed in rack mountable KFCS2/KFCS vary withmodel name and specification code of KFCS2/KFCS.

SEE ALSO

For the units and cards composing an KFCS2/KFCS, see the following:

The table in Section A2.5, “Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinets and Name of Each Part”

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 17: 6C2001

<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-9

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A2.5 Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet andName of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a duplexed KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet.

For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right half of the nest anddummy plates on the left half.

■ Name of Each Part : KFCS2/KFCS £

Front Side RearFCU

FCUpower distribution board

Main power distribution board

Distribution unit Distribution

unit

A020501E.EPS

Figure Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 18: 6C2001

A2-10<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

The figure below shows the configuration of the FCU of a duplexed KFCS2/KFCS with acabinet. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right of the nest anddummy plate on the left.

A020502E.EPS

Power supply unitsESB bus interface cards orESB bus interface master modules(*1)

Processor cards

Battery unit

ESB bus coupler units

Fan units IRIG-B coupler(*1)

External interface unit

Battery unit

*1: for SOE time synchronizationFigure Configuration of FCU : KFCS2/KFCS £

The models and numbers of cards installed in the FCU in an KFCS2/KFCS with cabinetdiffer depending on the model and suffix code of the KFCS2/KFCS as shown in the tablebelow.

Table Cards and Unit Name and Model : KFCS2/KFCS £

Model Field Control Unit Duplexed Field Control Unit

Card/Unit AFS30S, AFS40SAFG30S, AFG40S

AFS30D, AFS40DAFG30D, AFG40D

Power supply unit (100-120 V AC) PW301 1ps PW301 2ps

Power supply unit (220-240 V AC) PW302 1ps PW302 2ps

Power supply unit (24 V DC) PW304 1ps PW304 2ps

Processor card CP345 1ps CP345 2ps

ESB bus interface card SB301 1ps SB301 2ps

ESB bus interface master module(*1)

IRIG-B coupler(*1)

SB311 2ps

S9039FA 1ps

V net coupler unit AIP501 2ps AIP502 2ps

ESB bus coupler unit AIP532 1 or 2ps AIP532 2ps

A020503E.EPS

*1: for SOE time synchronization

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 19: 6C2001

<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-11

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Internal Power Distribution : KFCS2/KFCS £

● Single Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £

A020504E.EPS

L

N1

L

N2

L

N3

The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers.

CN1(FCU-L)

CN1(FCU-R)

FCU PDB

Front power distribution board

Rear power distribution board

KFCS2/KFCS front KFCS2/KFCS rear

TM2 AC OUT

Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Single Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 20: 6C2001

A2-12<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Dual Lines of Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £

A020505E.EPS

L

N1

L

N2

L

N3

The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers.

CN1(FCU-L)

CN1(FCU-R)

L

N1

L

N2

L

N3

FCU PDB

Front power distribution board

Rear power distribution board

KFCS2/KFCS front KFCS2/KFCS rear

TM2 AC OUTTM2 AC OUT

Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Dual Lines of Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 21: 6C2001

<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-13

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A2.6 Configuration of FFCS and Name of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a control system with FFCS.

■ Configuration of a Control System with FFCS : FFCS £

A020601E.EPS

AFF50D

Engineering Operation & Monitoring

ANB10D

HIS : Human Interface StationAFF50D : Field Control UnitANB10D : ESB Bus Node Unit (Local Node)ANR10D : ER Bus Node Unit (Remote Node)

V net

HISHIS

ESB Bus

ANB10D

ESB Bus

ANR10D

ER BusSB401

EB501

Restrictions on Node Units • ESB Bus : Total length should be less than 10 meters • ER Bus : Total length should be less than 185 meters if via YCB141 or less than 500 meters if adapted through YCB311. • Number of Nodes : Up to 3 (including both ESB bus nodes and ER bus nodes).

SB401

EC401

EB401

Figure Configuration of a Control System with FFCS : FFCS £

● Restrictions on I/O Module Installation : FFCS £

The number of I/O modules can be installed in FFCS is restricted accordingly.

SEE ALSO

For more information about I/O module connection cables and maintenance, see the following:

Input & Output Modules (IM 33Y06K01-01E)

For more information about restrictions on I/O module installation, see the following:

General Specification "FIO System Overview" (GS 33Q06Q01-31E)

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-01

Page 22: 6C2001

A2-14<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Configuration of Field Control Unit : FFCS £The figure below shows the configuration of a duplexed field control unit. For a non-redun-dant configuration model, a power supply module and a processor module are installed inthe left side slot and dummy plates on the right side slot.

A020602E.EPS

Processor module

External interface unitV net coupler unit

Power supply moduleInput/Output moduleor bus interface module

Utility unit

Base unit

Cable tray

CN2(CPU-L)

CN3(CPU-R)

CN1 ENBL

DSBL

CN2(CPU-L)

CN3(CPU-R)

TM1READY

FUSE RL1

CN1 ENBL

DSBL

CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC , L N

CN2 (PSU-R)

Figure Configuration of Field Control Unit : FFCS £

The type and number of the module to be installed in AFF50S/AFF50D vary with modelname and specification code of AFF50S/AFF50D.

● Configuration of a Control System with FFCS : FFCS £

Table Model Names of Field Control Unit Components : FFCS £

NameAFF50S AFF50D

Power supply module (100-120 V AC) PW481 1 or 2ps PW481 2ps

Power supply module (220-240 V AC) PW482 1 or 2ps PW482 2ps

Power supply module (24 V DC) PW484 1 or 2ps PW484 2ps

Processor module CP401 1 CP401 2ps

External interface unit 1 1

ER bus interface slave module (*3) EB501 1 or 2ps EB501 2ps

A020603E.EPS

V net coupler unit AIP504 2ps AIP504 2ps

ESB bus coupler module (*4) EC401 1 or 2ps EC401 2ps

ESB bus interface module (*1) SB401 1 or 2ps SB401 2ps

ER bus interface master module (*2) EB401 1 or 2ps EB401 2ps

Duplexed Field Control UnitField Control Unit

*1: Installed in ESB bus node unit (local node)*2: Installed in ESB bus node unit (local node) or field control unit*3: Installed in ER bus node unit (remote node)*4: Installed to FFCS when connecting with ESB bus node unit (local node)

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 23: 6C2001

<A3. Installation> A3-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A3. InstallationChapter A3 outlines how to install a Field Control Station.

For further details, see the following documents.

SEE ALSO

For further details of installation, see the following :

CENTUM CS 1000 Installation Guidance, TI 33S01J10-01E

CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance, TI 33Q01J10-01E

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 24: 6C2001

A3-2<A3. Installation>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A3.1 Mounting a Rack Mountable Type DevicesRegarding the rack mountable devices, the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS rack mount-able field control unit, FFCS rack mountable field control unit, PFCS/SFCS fieldcontrol station and PRK71 I/O expansion rack are concerned.

CAUTION

• If a device is a rack mountable type, the device should be mounted on a rack and putin a metal cabinet with a lock.

• When mounting a Field control unit and another equipment (such as a YNT: busrepeater) in the same rack, allow a space of at least 3 units (1 unit: 44.45 mm). Do notmount the devices too close to each other.However, when using the PRK71, do not leave a space between it and the PFCS/SFCS.

• When installing a total of two or more LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, ABC11S,ABC11D, and ACG10S in the same rack, ensure a space of at least 3 units (1 unit:44.45 mm) between each one.

A030101E.EPS

Figure PFCS and PRK71 Mounted on Rack : PFCS/SFCS

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 25: 6C2001

<A3. Installation> A3-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A030102E.EPS

Figure AFS10D/AFG10D Mounted on Rack : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

A030103E.EPS

Figure AFF50D Mounted on Rack : FFCS £

■ Provision of Space for Heat RadiationBe sure to allow space for radiation of heat at the top and bottom of the equipment.

• If the equipment is installed inside an instrument panel which has a closed top, installthe equipment at least 100 mm away from the top, and open an exhaust hole of atleast 200 cm2 or install an exhaust fan.

• Ensure a space of at least 50 mm between the back of the equipment and the rearpanel of the cabinet or the wall of the room.

■ Provision of Maintenance SpacesBe sure to allow spaces for maintenance.

• All cables for units and I/O modules are connected to the front.

• Checking the indicator lamp, setting, inspection, removal, and insertion of the cardsare performed in the front.

• Adequate space is required for suction and exhaust of the cooling fan of equipment.

• Ensure a space of at least 1000 mm in front of the equipment for wiring and mainte-nance.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 26: 6C2001

A3-4<A3. Installation>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Rack Mounting Space : PFCS/SFCS, FFCS

A030104E.EPS

Top panel

Front

Maintenance area

Do not stack instruments without space.

Fan or Outlet ; Vent Opening > 200cm2

Min. 50 mm

Min. 3 units

Min. 100 mm

Min. 1000 mm

Figure Rack Mounting Space : PFCS/SFCS, FFCS

● Rack Mounting Space : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

A030105E.EPS

Top panel

Front

Do not stack instruments without space.

Maintenance area

Fan or Outlet ; Vent Opening > 200cm2

Min. 50 mm

Min. 1000 mm

Min. 3 units

Min. 3 units

Min. 100 mm

Figure Rack Mounting Space : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 27: 6C2001

<A3. Installation> A3-5

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A3.1.1 Attaching the Brackets on a NestYou can choose the positions in the nest at which to attach the rack mounting brack-ets in consideration of maintenance space in front of the equipments as well as thedepth of the rack.

■ Attaching Brackets : PFCS/SFCSWhen a PFCS/SFCS is delivered without being installed in an enclosure or rack, the rackmounting brackets come with the PFCS/SFCS.

Attach the brackets on both sides of the nest. Bracket can be attached in two ways. Whenusing the PRK71 expansion rack, attach the brackets at the same positions in the expan-sion rack.

The figure below shows the positions at which the brackets are to be attached.

A030106E.EPS

*228*255

I/O Expansion rack

Nest

Insulation bushing

Bracket

The measurements marked with*are references for mounting the brackets.

Unit: mm

Choose either position to install the bracket.

Bracket

Front

Front

Figure Positions at which Brackets are to be Attached : PFCS/SFCS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 28: 6C2001

A3-6<A3. Installation>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

■ Attaching Brackets : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £When a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS is delivered without being installed inan enclosure or rack, the rack mounting brackets would be attached at the positions 162mm from the front panel. As shown in the figure below, you can choose the position fromthree different depths. Nevertheless, the position for the bracket of AFS30S and AFS30Dshould be 168 mm.

To change the bracket positions, detach and re-attach the brackets on both sides of theLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS in reference to the figure below before installing the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS inside an instrument panel or mounting on a rack. Clip an isolationbushing on each side of the bracket mounting hole for isolation.

The figure below shows the bracket positions.

A030107E.EPS

• Choose one from the three positions to install the bracket. The measurments marked with* are references for mounting the brackets.

Unit: mm

Isolation bushing

Isolation bushing

Bracket

Clip an isolation bushing on each side of the bracket mounting hole for isolation.

Front

Rear

*22

*162 *168

*262

Figure Positions at which Brackets are to be Attached : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

SEE ALSO

For how to attach the isolation bushings, see the following:

A3.1.2, “Installation of Rack Mountable Device”

Page 29: 6C2001

<A3. Installation> A3-7

IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

A3.1.2 Installation of Rack Mountable DeviceThis section describes how to install a PFCS/SFCS and a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, FFCS on a rack or in an instrument panel, its precautions, andhow to install the I/O expansion rack.

WARNING

A rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, FFCS weighs nearly 25 kg, a PFCS/SFCSwith two I/O module nests weights nearly 18 kg. An I/O expansion rack with 3 module nestsweights nearly 8 kg. A sufficient work space for installation should be ensured and theequipment should be installed by several persons with attention to safety.

Observe the following when you install a rack mountable device on a rack or an instrumentpanel.

● Isolation from the Rack

Isolate the rack mountable FCS from the rack by attaching isolation bushings. Fasten a pairof isolation bushings together to each of the screw holes on the plate or the bracket on theFCS to prevent the FCS from touching the rack. And then screw the FCS to the rack. Afterscrewing the FCS to the rack, confirm that the FCS is electrically isolated. Isolation bush-ings are supplied with the rack mountable FCS.

WARNING

When you install the ‘FCS with isolation bushings attached’ on a rack or an instrumentpanel, do not keep the FCS hung on loose screws in an unstable status. Too much forcemay apply to the isolation bushings and cause damaged or broken isolation bushings.

Page 30: 6C2001

A3-8<A3. Installation>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Installation Procedure

1. Fasten a pair of isolation bushings together to each of the screw holes on the plate orthe bracket on the FCS. The tapering end of the isolation bushings must come to thefront side where a screw enters.

2. Using eight M5 screws to fix the device onto the rack or the panel.

A030108E.EPS

Input/output module slots

Power supply module

Processor module

Cable tray

Using grounding terminal to connect the base unit to earth (less than 100 ohm). Make the grounding cable to pass throughthe tray and pull it down along the right side of the racks.

M5 screws (8 pieces)

M5 screws

Attach isolation to both sides of the plate.

● How to install isolation bushings

Rack

Rack

Isolation bushing(with a tapering)

Isolation bushing

Plate(front)

Isolation bushings (8 pieces)

Plate

Base unit

Figure Example of Mounting FFCS on a Rack : FFCS £

IMPORTANT

• Since the Field Control Unit (rack mountable type for FIO) does not have powerswitch, in order to turn the power supply on or off, it is recommended to use theexternal switch or breaker to turn on or off.

• If multiple node units exist, all the units should be grounded by connecting to the earthterminal (less than 100 ohm) separately.

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 31: 6C2001

<A3. Installation> A3-9

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Installing the I/O Extension Rack : PFCS/SFCSThe PFCS/SFCS comprises a common part and two I/O module nests, putting them on anI/O extension rack, three more I/O module nests can be installed. The I/O expansion rackand the PFCS/SFCS unit are always used as a pair.

● Installation Procedure

• Hook the I/O extension rack on the clicks provided on the PFCS/SFCS unit.

• Tentatively tighten the I/O extension rack to the 19-inch rack.

• Install the I/O extension rack by using the guide pins located on the back bottom of theI/O module nest as positioning marks.

• Securely tighten the I/O extension rack to the 19-inch rack.

• Connect the PFCS/SFCS and the I/O extension rack using shield bars (see figurebelow).

When installing the I/O extension rack on the rack, ensure insulation from the rack usinginsulation bushings and following the same procedure used for insulating the PFCS/SFCS.

Power to the I/O module nests installed on the I/O extension side is supplied from theconnector on the upper PFCS/SFCS back board.

There is no electrical circuit or back board on the I/O extension rack side.

The figure shows an example of the I/O extension rack and PFCS/SFCS installation.

A030109E.EPS

I/O expansion rack Hooks

Shield bar

Clicks

Figure Example of the I/O Expansion Rack Installation : PFCS/SFCS

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 32: 6C2001

A3-10<A3. Installation>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

A3.2 Installing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS (withCabinet)This section outlines the procedure and precautions for installation LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet.

CAUTION

LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet weighs nearly 400 kg with node. Ensure thatthere is sufficient work space for installation and install the equipment with several personswith attention to safety.

SEE ALSO

For the installation of the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS (with cabinet),see the following :

CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance (TI 33Q01J10-01E)

Page 33: 6C2001

<A3. Installation> A3-11

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A3.2.1 Maintenance AreaFor a cabinet type field control station of LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS, the FCU isinstalled in the front-upper part of the cabinet and the main power distribution boardis installed in the front-lower part of the cabinet. All the I/O nodes are installed in therear part of the cabinet according to the specifications. When positioning the cabi-net type field control station of LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS, the sufficient spacefor maintenance should be reserved.

■ Securing the maintenance area £When selecting the installation place of the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, secure a suffi-cient maintenance area. The reasons for securing the maintenance area are as follows :

• For normal operation

• For the space necessary for air supply and exhaust of the unit air-cooling fan.

• For the periodical inspection to run the unit stably

• For repairing the unit in the case of failure

Figure below shows the maintenance area required for the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.Consider this maintenance area when determining the size of the room in which to installthe LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.

1000

Unit: mm

800

1000

650

L+50

F

External Dimension

1 2 3 4

600 1200 1800 2400L

2 4 6 8d

(note): Cabinets can be positioned side-by-side. "d" refers to the allowable deviation from the external dimensions when positioned side-by-side.

Numberof

Cabinets

A030201E.EPS

Figure Maintenance Area : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 34: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 35: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4. Cable ConnectionsChapter A4 outlines the methods for power supply wiring, grounding, connectingbus cables to an FCS which has already been installed.

SEE ALSO

For details on power supply cable connection, earth connection and filed wiring path, see the following:

CENTUM CS 1000 Installation Guidance, TI 33S01J10-01E

CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance, TI 33Q01J10-01E

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 36: 6C2001

A4-2<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.1 Power Supply WiringThe following cautions should be noticed when connecting the power supply cableto the cabinet.

CAUTION

• Wire the power cable through the conduit at the desk entrance for the following rea-sons:

• To prevent damage to the cable due to contact with a metal plate.

• To avoid applying excessive weight on the solderless lugs or power connectionterminals due to the weight of the cable.

• Turn off the main power supply, and perform work after confirming with a tester thatthere is no power in the power cable to be connected.

• After the power cable has been connected, turn on the power to the power cable withthe breaker in the power panel turned OFF. Then, confirm with a tester that normalpower is being supplied to the power connection terminal.

• Wire the power cable so that a distance of 1 cm or more is maintained from othersignal lines.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 37: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.1.1 Wiring of Cabinet Internal Power Supply Cables

IMPORTANT

Confirm that the connector is firmly inserted to the position.

SEE ALSO

For more information about wiring of cabinet internal power supply cables, see the following:

“■ Internal Power Distribution : LFCS2/LFCS £” in A2.3 “Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinetand Name of Each Part”

“■ Internal Power Distribution : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A2.5 “Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabi-net and Name of Each Part”

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 38: 6C2001

A4-4<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

A4.1.2 Power Supply Cable Wiring of FFCSThis section describes how to power cable wiring a FFCS.

IMPORTANT

It is recommended to use a switch or breaker in the power supply, so that the power supplycan be turned on/off for individual FFCS at maintenance.

■ Connecting Power Cable : FFCS £The terminals for connecting power cables are illustrated as follows.

Use the M4 screws to connect the wires to the power supply input terminals on the externalinterface unit (TM2).

A040101E.EPS

Power supply input terminal (TM2)

TM1READY

FUSE RL1 CN1 (PSU-L)

CN2 (PSU-R)

Power supply connectors for power supply moduleCN1 : Left side power supply moduleCN2 : Right side power supply module

N

LTM2 100-120V AC � L N

Power supply input terminal (AC)

Power supply input terminal (24V DC)�

Figure External Interface Unit and Power Supply Terminal : FFCS £

When wiring the power supply cables, follow the procedure below.

1. Cut the end of the cable and install a crimp terminal (round shape) for M4 screw.

2. Remove the protective cover from the TM2 terminals on the external interface unit.

3. Connect the non-grounding side to the terminal L and the grounding side to theterminal N (using M4 screws).

4. Put the protective cover back to the external interface unit.

Page 39: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-5

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

■ Connecting Power Cable : FFCS £A power supply module is provided with an approximately 1-meter long power cable with aconnector on one side.

This power cable should be connected as follows:

• The cable of the power supply module on the left side should be connected to CN1(PSU-L) on the external interface unit.

• The cable of the power supply module on the right side should be connected to CN2(PSU-R) on the external interface unit.

If only a single power supply module is used, the right side is covered with a dummy plate.

A040102E.EPS

Front view of power supply module Side view of power supply module

LN

Power supply input terminal

Grounding terminal

Figure Power Supply Cable Connection : FFCS £

Page 40: 6C2001

A4-6<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.2 GroundingBe sure to ground the equipment in order to avoid the electric shock of the operatorand maintenance engineers and to prevent the influence of external noise.

CAUTION

When grounding the equipment, connect the grounding cable to the designated protectivegrounding terminal.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 41: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-7

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.2.1 Grounding of PFCD/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCSWhen grounding the PFCD/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS the followingconditions are required.

• The grounding resistance must be 100 ohm or less.

• For the grounding bus, use a 22 mm2 cable or thicker.

• The grounding bar for connecting grounding cables is at the bottom front of the cabi-net and is not isolated from the FCU.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 42: 6C2001

A4-8<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.2.2 Grounding of FFCSTo prevent from the external noises, the FFCS must be grounded.

■ Wiring : FFCS £Use the grounding terminal on the base unit for wiring the grounding cables.

Pull down the grounding cable through the tray from the right side of the rack.

• The grounding resistance must be 100 ohm or less.

• The wire for grounding should be about 2 mm2 thick.

A040201E.EPS

Field control unit

CN2(CPU-L)

CN3(CPU-R)

CN1 ENBL

DSBL

CN2(CPU-L)

CN3(CPU-R)

TM1READY

FUSE RL1

CN1 ENBL

DSBL

CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC � L N

CN2 (PSU-R)

Grounding terminal

Cable tray

Grounding wire

Figure Ground Wiring : FFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 43: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-9

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.3 Connecting the Bus CablesThis section describes the connections of the VL net, V net, RIO bus, ESB bus andER bus cables .

Hereinafter, the control bus is referred to represent both V net and VL net.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 44: 6C2001

A4-10<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.3.1 Connecting the PFCS/SFCS Bus CableThis chapter describes how to connect cables of control bus (VL net, V net) to PFCS/SFCS via connector assembly and the method of cable connection, as well as theconnection between V net and VL net.

WARNING

When wiring the bus cable for control bus, note the following:

• Always connect “Bus 1 to Bus 1” and “Bus 2 to Bus 2” when connecting the PC toPFCS/SFCS. Do not connect “Bus 1 to Bus 2” and “Bus 2 to Bus 1.”

• When the control bus connection becomes an end terminal for the station, install acontrol bus terminator on the unwired connection port of the control bus branch plug.

■ Bus Cable Connection : PFCS ¡• PFCS is connected to other stations via VL net cables. VL net is in either single con-

figuration or dual-redundant configuration.

■ Bus Cable Connection : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £• SFCS is connected to other stations via V net cables. V net is in dual-redundant

configuration.

• PFCS is connected to other stations via V net cables. V net is in either single configu-ration or dual-redundant configuration.

A040301E.EPS

To the next device. If this is an end terminal, install a terminator.From other devices

Bus 2 Bus 2

Bus 1 Bus 1

Figure Connecting the Control Bus Cable : PFCS/SFCS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 45: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-11

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Connection Between V net Cable and VL net Cable ¡V net cable and VL net cable can be connected via the control bus adapter (YCB147) orcontrol bus converter unit (YCB149).

However, the weight and the strength of the cables are various, the control bus adapterneeds to be fixed firmly.

• The V net cable should be fixed somewhere close to the control bus adapter, so thatthe VL net cable will not be stressed by the weight of the V net cable.

• To fix the control bus adapter somewhere near FCS or HIS above the floor level so asto make maintenance convenient.

• Do not fix the control bus adapter to the place where people may pass by.

An example of control bus adapter installation is shown below.

V net cables

PFCS

Under floor level

A040302E.EPS

VL net cable

VL net branch connector

Control bus adapter

Fixed

Figure An example of fixing the control bus adapter ¡

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 46: 6C2001

A4-12<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Wiring the Control Bus : PFCS/SFCS

WARNING

When disconnecting a PFCS or SFCS from the control bus, the following cautions shouldbe noted.

When removing the PFCS/SFCS from control bus while the system is in operation, first tiltthe switch on the control bus coupler unit toward the DSBL side, then remove the entirecontrol bus connector assembly from the control bus coupler unit.

● How to Connect the Control Bus Cable : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £

After tilting the switch on the control bus coupler unit toward the DSBL side, connect twocontrol bus cables to Coupler Bus 1 and Coupler Bus 2 of the PFCS control bus coupler unit.

1. Turn the control bus coupler unit into DSBL position.

2. Remove the connector assembly (the part to which control bus cables are connected)from the control bus coupler unit. Loosen the two connector assembly mountingscrews located on the right and left (A), and pull the connector assembly forward toremove it. (Depth: 60 mm)

3. Loosen the screw located on the top of the connector assembly cable cover (B), anddisassemble the assembly as shown in the figure. The cable cover and branch plugcan be disassembled into three parts, by vertically sliding the top and bottom parts ofthe cable cover.

CN

1

CN

2

ENBL

DSBLRCV

SND

R

SND

L

BUS1

Connector assemblyA040303E.EPS

Branch connector

B ScrewA Screws

BNC type connector(N type connector is for V net cables)

Figure Control Bus Coupler Unit : PFCS/SFCS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 47: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-13

IM 33Q06C20-01E

4. Connect bus cables to branch plug.

The branch plug for connecting VL net cables is BNC type (*1).

The branch plug for connecting V net cables (10BASE-2) is BNC type.

The branch plug for connecting V net cables (10BASE-5) is N type.

5. When the unit is the end of the connection, be sure to install a terminator on theconnector to which the control bus cable is not connected so that appropriate electri-cal characteristics are maintained.

Model of terminator for VL net: YCB148(*1)

Model of V net cables (10BASE-2): YCB148

Model of V net cables (10BASE-5): YCB118

A040304E.EPS

Cable cover

Cable cover

Control bus cables

(If the unit is the end of control bus connection, install a control bus terminator.)

Control bus terminator

Figure Connecting the Control Bus Cable : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £

6. To prevent the cables from tensions, the bending radius of the cables should begreater than the following given values:

VL net cable bending radius: 50mm (*1)

V net cable (10BASE-2) bending radius: 50mm

V net cable (10BASE-5) bending radius: 100mm*1: ¡ Can only be applied to CS 1000

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 48: 6C2001

A4-14<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Installing the Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS

When control bus cables have been connected, install the connector assembly to thecontrol bus coupler unit by following the steps below:

1. Align the groove on the control bus branch plug, to which control bus cables areconnected, with the rail on the cable cover (bottom part). Slide the rail into the grooveby pushing the branch plug and the cover from both sides.

2. Similarly, align the rail on the cable cover (top part) with the groove on the control busbranch connector, by sandwiching the control bus cables between them.

3. Tighten the screw on the top of the cable cover. The connector assembly has beenassembled.

A040305E.EPS

Screw

Cable cover(top part)

Control bus cables

The groove on the controlbus branch connector

Rail (both sides)

Cable cover(bottom part)

Figure Connecting the Branch Plug and the Cable Cover : PFCS/SFCS

4. Align the right and left guide rails on the control bus coupler unit with the rails on theconnector assembly, and push the assembly into the unit until it stops. The connectorassembly and the control bus coupler are connected by the connector.

5. Fix the connector assembly to the control bus coupler unit by tightening two mountingscrews, one on the right and one the left.

A040306E.EPS

Control bus coupler unit

Guide rail (both sides)

Mounting screw

Mounting screw

Connector assembly

Control bus cables

Rail (both sides)

Figure Connecting the Control Bus Coupler Unit and the Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 49: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-15

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.3.2 Connecting the Bus Cables to LFCS2/LFCSThis section explains the wiring of V net and RIO bus to LFCS2/LFCS.

As for V net; how to connect coupler unit and connector assembly with the V netcables, how to attach the clamp filter to the V net cables, and how to modify the V netconnection.

As for RIO bus cables, how to connect the cables to the RIO bus terminals and howto grounding the RIO bus cables will be explaines below.

WARNING

When connecting a HIS or SFCS and LFCS2/LFCS, or an LFCS2/LFCS and conversionconnector box, etc. using the V net, be careful about the following:

• Connect Bus 1 to Bus 1 and Bus 2 to Bus 2. Do not connect Bus 1 to Bus 2, or Bus 2to Bus 1.

• For each of the stations at both ends of the V net, install the V net terminator at theopened port of the V net connector unit.

• The number of adaptive connector boxes and the distance from the cable as well asthe number of stations are limited. When the numbers exceeds the limitation, busrepeater should be used instead of adaptive connector.

SEE ALSO

For details on the limitation mentioned above, refer the system specification (GS 33Q01B10-01E) forCENTUM CS 3000 distribution production control system.

WARNING

• Disconnection of LFCS2/LFCS from V net

When disconnecting an LFCS2/LFCS from the V net while the system is running,make sure you detach the V net connector assembly rather than disconnecting the Vnet cable only.

Leave the cable attached on the V net connector assembly.

Detaching the V net cable from the V net connector assembly will break the V netcommunication and cause a network error, and also affect the communication ofother stations on the network.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 50: 6C2001

A4-16<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Bus Cable Connection : LFCS2/LFCS £

● Example of Connection of V net and RIO Bus : LFCS2/LFCS £

The figure below shows the connection human interface station (HIS) or generic PC, whichare both referred to as “HIS” hereafter, as a generic name, to LFCS2/LFCS with V net andconnection of LFCS2/LFCS and nodes with RIO bus.

RIO bus

Modem

V net

: Terminator

Control busAdapter

HIS(PC)

HIS(PC)

FCU ofLFCS2/LFCS

A040307E.EPS

Ethernet

HIS

Node Node Node

Control busAdapter

Figure V net and RIO Bus : LFCS2/LFCS £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 51: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-17

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5) : LFCS2/LFCS £

The figure below shows the connection SFCS to AFG10D with V net cable (10BASE-5).

A040308E.EPS

V net coupler (for Bus 2)

V net coupler (for Bus 2)

Clamp filters

To next unit (Install a terminator if this is an end.)

V net coupler (for Bus 1)

V net coupler (for Bus 1)

V net cables (10BASE-5)

AFG10D

PFCD (Compact FCS)

Bus 1 Bus 2

Figure Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5) : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 52: 6C2001

A4-18<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5 to 10BASE-2) : LFCS2/LFCS £

V net Cable Connection (10BASE-2 and 10BASE-5): LFCS2/LFCS

The following figure illustrates how to use adapter YCB147 to connect V net 10BASE-5cable to V net 10BASE-2 cable.

A040309E.EPS

Control busadapter

YCB147

PRINTERRS232C-A

(COM2)

E X TRS232C-B

(COM1)SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 SLOT7

V net coupler (for Bus 2)

Clamp filters

V net coupler (for Bus 1)

V net cables (10BASE-5)

V net cables (10BASE-2)

Clamp filters

AFS10D/AFG10D

Bus 1 Bus 2

V net

HIS

Figure Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5 to 10BASE-2) : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 53: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-19

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Connecting the V net Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £Follow the procedure below to connect two V net cables to two ports (buses 1 and 2) of therightmost V net coupler unit in the FCU.

1. Loosen the two attaching screws at the top and bottom of the connector assembly.(See the figure below.) Then pull to detach the connector assembly (60 mm depth)from the V net coupler unit.

2. Loosen the screw on the right cable cover of the connector assembly and disas-semble the connector assembly as shown in the figure. Slide to separate the cablecovers sideways for easy disassembly.

3. Connect the V net cables to the connector unit.Do not bend the cables at a bending radius of less than 100 mm.

4. If the V net connection ends at this station, make sure you install a terminator at theunused connector in order to match the electrical characteristics. (See the figure onthe next page.)

Terminator for V net cable (10BASE-5) :Model YCB118

Terminator for V net cable (10BASE-2) :Model YCB148

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

ENEL

DSEL

V Net

CN1

CN2

A040310E.EPS

Cable cover

Cable cover

Coupler unit

Connector assemblyUnit attaching screw

Coupler unit attaching screw

Connector assembly

Connector assembly attaching screw

Connector assembly attaching screw

V net connector unit

N-type connector

Figure V net Coupler Unit and Connector Assembly : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 54: 6C2001

A4-20<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A040311E.EPS

Cable cover

Cable cover

V net branch plug cable cover

V net branch plug cable cover

V net cables

Plug the unused connector with a V net terminator at both ends of the V net connection.

V net terminator

Figure V net Cable Connection and Terminator : LFCS2/LFCS £

■ Replacing the Connector Assembly : LFCS2/LFCS £After connecting the V net cable(s), follow the procedure below to replace the connectorassembly on the V net coupler unit.

1. Slide the V net connector unit with the cable(s) into the left cable cover up to thecenter of the connector unit, while fitting the rail of the cable cover into the slot of the Vnet connector unit.

2. In the same manner, while fitting the rail of the right cable cover into the slot of the Vnet connector unit, put the V net cables between the cable covers.

3. Tighten the screw on the right cable cover at the torque of approximately 0.6 N•m.This completes the re-assembly of the connector assembly.

4. Mate the rails on the connector assembly unit with the top and bottom guide rails onthe V net coupler unit, and then push the connector assembly into the bottom. Theconnector assembly and V net coupler unit are connected by the V net connector unit.

5. Tighten the attaching screws at the top and bottom of the connector assembly at thetorque of approximately 0.25 N•m to fix the assembly to the coupler unit.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 55: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-21

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Attaching the Clamp Filters (Ferrite Cores) : LFCS2/LFCS £

IMPORTANT

The clamp filter case is made of plastic, and so may crack when opened and closed at asub-zero temperature (in centigrade) or when a mechanical shock is given, such as if itfalls.

Be careful to follow the working and storage temperature limits (of an HIS and LFCS2/LFCS).

After completing the V net cable (10BASE-5 cable) connection, attach the clamp filters (thatcome with the product) to the V net cables over the cable sheath in order to improve thenoise isolation.

● Clamp Filter Set : LFCS2/LFCS £

6 ferrite cores (part No. A1179MN) per V net cable

Cable fasteners (supplied with ferrite cores)

● Positions to Attach Clamp Filters : LFCS2/LFCS £

If the cable installation plan allows, attach three clamp filters close to each other at about20 cm from the connector on each end of the cable. If this is not possible, attach themwithin 1 meter from the connector on each end.

The distance between the clamp filters and the connector should be as small as possible inorder to prevent intrusion of noise from the portion between connector and clamp filters.

A040312E.EPS

Clamp filters

V net cable

Connector

Connector

Approx. 20 cm

Figure Positions to Attach Clamp Filters : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 56: 6C2001

A4-22<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Attaching the Clamp Filters : LFCS2/LFCS £

1. Use your finger to release the two locking hooks of a clamp filter. The clamp filter canthen be opened up to 150 degrees.

A040313E.EPS

Locking hooks

Ferrite cores

V net cable

Tie wrap Fasten with the tie wrap.

Lock the two hooks.

Figure Attaching a Clamp Filter : LFCS2/LFCS £

2. Fit the V net cable into the cylindrical gap in the opened clamp filter.

3. Close the clamp filter and lock the two locking hooks.

4. Put a tie wrap through one side of the clamp filter and fasten the tie wrap over thecable sheath to fix the clamp filter.

5. In the same manner, attach three clamp filters (two more) close to each other on eachside of the cable.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 57: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-23

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Modifying the V net Connection while the System is Running : LFCS2/LFCS £

When adding or removing communication components while the system is running, caremust be taken so as not to affect the system communication.

● When Adding a Component on V net : LFCS2/LFCS £

WARNING

When adding a component on the V net while the system is running, do not perform themodification on both buses 1 and 2 at the same time; doing so will stop the overall systemcommunication.

Confirm that there is no abnormality in the bus side that is not to be modified before startingthe modification, then carry out the modification on one bus at a time.

● Removing a Component from V net : LFCS2/LFCS £

WARNING

Do not disconnect a V net cable from the V net connector assembly unit; doing so will causea V net communication error.

1. Set the communication switch on the V net coupler unit of the component that youwant to remove, to DSBL to stop the V net communication of the component.

2. Detach the V net connector assembly from the V net coupler unit. This does not affectthe overall system communication.

● Re-connecting a Component to V net : LFCS2/LFCS £

To re-connect a component that you have removed from the V net, follow the procedurebelow.

1. Set the communication switch on the V net coupler unit of the component that youwant to re-connect, to DSBL to stop the V net communication of the component.

2. Re-attach the V net connector assembly to the V net coupler unit.

3. Set the communication switch on the V net coupler unit to ENBL.

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 58: 6C2001

A4-24<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Grounding the V net : LFCS2/LFCS £The V net (10BASE-5) must be grounded.

CAUTION

The grounding unit for V net is used to ground the V net components at one place forsafety. (Ground the V net at one place within each segment. A segment indicates the rangeof the V net network in which communication can be performed without a repeater.)

To enhance the safety, ground near the center (in terms of distance) of the segment.

● Parts Contained in Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £

Table Parts Contained in Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £

A040314E.EPS

Part Number Parts

A1485JT (grounding unit)

Metal block (�2)M4 bolt (�2)M4 washer (�2)Crimp-on lug (�1)Insertion claw (�1)

S9027UV

Grounding cable (800 mm�1; with M4 crimp-on lug on one side for connection to A1485JT, and M5 crimp-on lug on the other side for connection to grounding bar)

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 59: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-25

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Attaching a Grounding Unit to the V net Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £

Follow the procedure below to attach a grounding unit to the V net Cable.

1. Unscrew the two bolts of the grounding unit, and then separate the unit into the twometal blocks. The crimp-on lug fixed with a bolt is no longer necessary.

2. Insert the insertion claw that comes with the grounding unit, into the block (see thefigure below).

A040315E.EPS

Insertion claw

Bolt

Bolt

Grounding unit for V net(metal blocks)

Figure Inserting the Insertion Claw : LFCS2/LFCS £

3. Clamp the V net cable (YCB111) with the two metal blocks and tighten the two boltsalternately. At this time, fix the M4 crimp-on lug on one side of the grounding cablewith either bolt.Tightening the bolts makes the insertion claw penetrate the sheath of the V net cableand contact the outer conductor.

A040316E.EPS

Bolt

Bolt

WasherM4 crimp-on lug

M5 crimp-on lug

Washer

Grounding unit(metal block)

V net cable

Grounding cable

Insertion claw

Figure Assembling the Grounding Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £

4. After tightening the bolts, clip off the pin of the insertion claw that protrudes from themetal block.

5. Connect the other side of the connector with the M5 crimp-on lug, to the grounding barof the cabinet.

6. Be sure that the metal block will not touch a conductive material having a differentpotential from the grounding bar.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 60: 6C2001

A4-26<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Placing the Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £

Place the grounding unit for V net at the bottom of a cabinet (the grounding unit need notbe fixed), and connect the grounding cable between the grounding unit and the groundingbar as shown below.

A040317E.EPS

V net cable

Grounding unitGrounding cable

Grounding bar in a cabinet or grounding bar met with 100 ohms or less

Grounding bar

Figure Placing and Connecting the Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 61: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-27

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Connecting the RIO Bus Cables : LFCS2/LFCS £

WARNING

Disconnection and Connection of RIO Bus

• When disconnecting and connecting an RIO bus cable while the system is running,set the switch of the RIO bus coupler to DSBL.

• When disconnecting the RIO bus from an RIO bus coupler unit for maintenance of theFCU, detach the RIO bus branch connector. Do not disconnect the cables themselvesfrom the RIO bus branch connector.

The RIO bus is a bus that can be made dual redundant and used for communicationbetween an LFCS2/LFCS and nodes. See the figure on the next page and follow theprocedure below to connect the RIO bus cables.

1. Connect an RIO bus cable to the coupler for RIO bus 1 in the lower left of the FCU.

2. If the RIO bus is dual redundant, connect cables to the couplers for both bus 1 (left)and bus 2 (right).

3. At the end of the RIO bus connections, install the terminator (YCB128) at the unusedconnector of the RIO bus branch connector.

The figure below shows an example of RIO bus connections.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 62: 6C2001

A4-28<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to a Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS :LFCS2/LFCS £

A040318E.EPS

1 2 3

4 5 6

12

3

45

6

12

3

45

6

1 2 3

4 5 6

OKOK

Color of RIO bus Cable

[3][6]

Terminalsymbol of RIO bus branch

connector

[1][4]

[2][5]

Wiring color

Tin-plated semitransparent covering or blue

Copper wire with semitransparent covering or white

Gray covering or green

To next node (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)

RIO bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant.)

RIO bus branch connector

Terminals on node interface unit

From another node

Bus 1

Bus 1 Bus 2

Bus 2

AFS10D/AFG10D

Figure Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to a Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 63: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-29

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to an LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS £

A040319E.EPS

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

4 5 6

Terminals on RIO bus coupler unit

RIO bus distribution unit

To next node (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)

Front of Cabinet

From another node

Bus 1 Bus 2

Terminals on NIU

RIO bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant.)

Rear of Cabinet

Bus 1 Bus 2

*1: Use the RIO bus unit in the rear for connection to the next node. (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)

Figure Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to an LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 64: 6C2001

A4-30<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

The following describes the standard for RIO bus cables used and the connection method.

● Standard for RIO Bus Cables : LFCS2/LFCS £

As an RIO bus cable, use the YCB121 sold by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.

A040320E.EPS

Shield

Figure RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £

● Connecting an RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £

Follow the procedure below to connect an RIO bus cable.

SEE ALSO

For details of how to connect each wire of an RIO bus cable to each screw terminal, see the following:

“● Details of Terminal Connections of RIO Bus Cable”

IMPORTANT

Make sure you install a terminator at both ends of the RIO bus connection.

Do not bend an RIO bus cable at a bending radius of less than 100 mm.

1. Detach the terminal cover (acrylic).

2. Connect the RIO bus cable from another node to terminals 4-6 (M4 screw terminals)of the RIO bus connector unit.

3. Connect the RIO bus cable to the next node to terminals 1-3 of the RIO bus branchconnector. It is easier to connect a cable to terminals 4-6 first.

4. Do not bend the RIO bus cables at a bending radius of less than 100 mm.

5. If no further node is connected, install a terminator (YCB128) over terminals 1-2 inorder to match the electrical characteristics. (See the figure on the next page.)

1 2 3

4 5 6

A040321E.EPS

Attaching screw of RIO bus branch connector

Attaching screw of RIO bus branch connector

Figure Terminals of RIO Bus Branch Connector : LFCS2/LFCS £

Table Sheath Colors of Wires in RIO Bus Cables and Corresponding Terminals : LFCS2/LFCS£

Terminal Nos. 1, 4 2, 5 3, 6

Wire color Semitransparent (tinned wire) or blue

Semitransparent (copper wire) or white Gray or green

A040322E.EPS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 65: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-31

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A040323E.EPS

Terminal 1

Terminal 2

Terminator (YCB128)

RIO bus connector unit

Figure Installing Terminator at RIO Bus Connector Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £

TIP

Since terminals 4-6 are in the lower back beneath terminals 1-3 on an RIO bus connector unit, it is easierto connect the wires to terminals 4-6 before terminals 1-3.

An RIO bus cable from an LFCS2/LFCS or another node, or an RIO bus cable to be connected to thenext node can be connected to either terminals 1-3 or 4-6, in principle. However, on the connector unit atwhich the bus connection ends, it is recommended to connect the RIO bus cable to terminals 4-6 andinstall a terminator over terminals 1 and 2. This makes it easier to wire a node that is added later.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 66: 6C2001

A4-32<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Details of Terminal Connections of RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £

1. Losen the terminal screw.

2. Push down the spring base. There should be a 2 mm gap between the screw and thespring base.

3. Insert the crimp-on lug of a wire under the screw and fit the lug into the screw bottom.

4. Tighten the screw.

A040324E.EPS

Initial state

Fixed

Sectional View

ScrewSpring base

Losened

Approx. 2 mm

Crimp-on lug

Inserting crimp-on lug

Fitting the lug

Figure Wiring of RIO Bus Cable to Terminals : LFCS2/LFCS £

A040325E.EPS

CORRECT WRONG

Crimp-on lug

Sleeve

Ring (tongue)

Figure Correct Tightening of Crimp-on Lug : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 67: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-33

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Detaching an RIO Bus Connector Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £

Unscrew the attaching screws (two, black M3 screws.) Then pull to detach it from the nestconnector.

● Installing an RIO Bus Terminator : LFCS2/LFCS £

In the same way as “Details of Terminal Connections of RIO Bus Cable”, install the termina-tor over screw terminals 1-2 (recommended) or 4-5. Do not use terminal 3 or 6.

SEE ALSO

For details on the branch plug and the screws for installation as well as the screws of terminals, see thefollowing:

“■ Connecting the RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £”

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 68: 6C2001

A4-34<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Grounding the RIO Bus : LFCS2/LFCS £

CAUTION

The equipment connected by the RIO bus must be grounded to a single grounding point.Ground one point of each segment of the RIO bus. If the RIO bus is dual redundant, groundboth bus lines. (A segment denotes the range of the RIO bus in which communication canbe performed without a repeater.)

● When Repeater is not Used : LFCS2/LFCS £

To ground the RIO bus, connect terminal 3 or 6 of the RIO bus connector unit to the FCUcasing using a grounding cable included in the accessories (see the figure below).

A040326E.EPS

Grounding cables

FCU

Figure Grounding the RIO Bus (when repeater is not used) : LFCS2/LFCS £

● When Repeater is Used : LFCS2/LFCS £

When an optical or electrical repeater is used, ground the RIO bus at the nearest point tothe FCU within each segment.

A040327E.EPS

Fiber optic cable YNT

RIO bus coupler unit

RIO bus terminator

(Example of single (not dual redundant) bus)

RIO bus coupler unit

NIUNIU

RIO bus

NIU

FCU

YNT repeater

$$$$$$

Grounding cable

Segment 1 Segment 2

Figure Grounding the RIO Bus (when repeater is used) : LFCS2/LFCS £

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 69: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-35

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.3.3 Connecting the Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCSConnecting V net cables of KFCS2/KFCS, installing clamp filters and V net cableswiring is the same as LFCS2/LFCS. In this section, how to connect the ESB bus andER bus is explained.

WARNING

When connecting a HIS or SFCS and LFCS2/LFCS, or an KFCS2/KFCS and conversionconnector box, etc. using the V net, be careful about the following:

• Connect bus 1 to bus 1 and bus 2 to bus 2. Do not connect bus 1 to bus 2, or bus 2 tobus 1.

• For each of the stations at both ends of the V net, install the V net terminator at theopened port of the V net connector unit.

• The number of adaptive connector boxes and the distance from the cable as well asthe number of stations are limited. When the numbers exceeds the limitation, busrepeater should be used instead of adaptive connector.

SEE ALSO

For details on the limitation mentioned above, refer the system specification (GS 33Q01B10-01E) forCENTUM CS 3000 distribution production control system.

WARNING

• Disconnection of KFCS2/KFCS from V net

When disconnecting an KFCS2/KFCS from the V net while the system is running,make sure you detach the V net connector assembly rather than disconnecting the Vnet cable only.

Leave the V net connector unit attached to the cable(s).

Detaching the V net connector from the V net cable breaks the V net, causes a net-work error, and also affects communication of other stations on the network.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 70: 6C2001

A4-36<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Bus Cable Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £The figure below shows the connection human interface station (HIS) to KFCS2/KFCS withV net and connection of KFCS2/KFCS and nodes with ESB bus.

ESB bus

V net

: TerminatorBus conversion boxBus conversion box

HIS(PC)

HIS(PC)

KFCS2/KFCS

A040328E.EPS

Ethernet

HIS

Node Node

Figure V net and ESB Bus : KFCS2/KFCS £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 71: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-37

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Connecting ESB Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £ESB bus cable (YCB301) is specific cable used for connecting the ESB bus coupler unit(AIP532) on FCU and the ESB bus slave interface module (SB401) on local node unit.

WARNING

For the connector on the ESB bus coupler, the torque for fixing the ESB bus cable shouldbe around 0.3 N•m.

For the T-type connector on the model SB401, the torque for fixing the ESB bus cableshould also be around 0.3 N•m.

● Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £

1. Connect the ESB bus cable to the connector of ESB bus coupler unit on the lower-leftof FCU.

2. If the ESB bus is in dual-redundant configuration, the left side ESB bus coupler unit isfor bus 1, the right side is for bus 2.

3. The ESB bus T-type connector (Part No. S9879UK) should be used. At the end of theESB bus node, the T-type connector (Part No. S9880UK) on SB401 with terminatorshould be used.

ESB cable connection is illustrated in the following figure.

SEE ALSO

For more information about connecting ESB bus cable to ANB10 local nodes, see the following:

“Input & Output Modules (IM 33Y06K01-01E)”

ESB bus cable(YCB301)

ESB bus coupler unit(AIP532)

ANB10Local node unit

SB401 SB401

A040329E.EPS

T-type connector T-type connector

Figure Connection of ESB Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 72: 6C2001

A4-38<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● ESB Bus KFCS2/KFCS £

Either ESB bus branching connector or the branching connector that has a built-in ESB busterminator must be mounted to SB401 installed in ESB bus node unit. If a node unit isconnected next, select ESB bus branching connector. If the node unit is the last one, selectthe branching connector that has a built-in ESB bus terminator.

A040330E.EPS

Bus1

ESB bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant)

REVISIONU H1 H2

MODEL

AIP532STYLE1 SI

YOKOGAWA

ESB BusCN1

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

Bus 2

SB401 withS9879UK

SB401 withS9879UK

Bus 2

To next node

Bus 1

REVISIONU H1 H2

MODEL

AIP532STYLE1 SI

YOKOGAWA

ESB BusCN1

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

AFG30D

REVISIONU H1 H2

MODEL

AIP532STYLE1 SI

YOKOGAWA

ESB BusCN1

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

REVISIONU H1 H2

MODEL

AIP532STYLE1 SI

YOKOGAWA

ESB BusCN1

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

ANB10DConnector unit for

ESB bus(S9879UK)Connector unit

with terminator forESB bus (S9880UK)

ESB bus cable (YCB301)

Screw tightening torque: 0.3 N•m

Figure ESB Bus : KFCS2/KFCS £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 73: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-39

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Connecting ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £ER bus cable (YCB141) is specific cable used for connecting the ER bus master interfacemodule (EB401) on local node unit and the ER bus slave interface module (EB501) onremote node unit.

● Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £

1. Connect the ER bus cable to the connector of EB401 on the left side (odd slot) of localnode unit.

2. If the ER bus is in dual-redundant configuration, the left side (odd slot) EB401 is forbus 1, the right side (even slot) is for bus 2.

3. At the end of the ER bus node, the T-type connector (Model YCB148) on EB501 withterminator should be used.

ER cable connection is illustrated in the following figure.

SEE ALSO

For more information about connecting ER bus cable to ANB10 local nodes, see the following:

“Input & Output Modules (IM 33Y06K01-01E)”

A040331E.EPS

EB401 ER bus(YCB141)

Local node unit(ANB10D)

Remote node unit(ANR10D)

To next node (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)

EB501

Figure Connection of ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 74: 6C2001

A4-40<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● ER Bus Wiring : KFCS2/KFCS £

The figure shown below describes how to wiring ER bus:

A040332E.EPS

ANB10D

EB401

Terminator (*1)(YCB148)

Clamp filter (*2)(A1193MN)

ANR10D

YCB141

Connect to the next ER bus node unit

Adjust the cable length on the cable tray if required

Fix with using a cable fastener at the front right edge of cable tray. Separate from other cables as much as possible.

Separate from other cables

Fix with using a cable fastener at the front right edge of cable tray

*1: Regarding EB401 and a remote node, if one side of T-type connector is terminal, mount a terminator. Two terminatorsare supplied with EB401.

*2: Regarding EB401 and a remote node, mount clamp filters to both side of T-type connector. If one of the sides isterminal, mount a clamp filter to only the cable side. Two (four for dual-redundant) clamp filters are supplied with theremote node. For EB401, use the clamp filter supplied with the terminal remote node.

Figure ER Bus Wiring : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 75: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-41

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Procedure of ER Bus Cable Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £

An ER bus cable is equivalent to a 10BASE-2 Ethernet cable (model YCB141). The follow-ing explains how to connect it:

1. Connect a T-type connector to the BNC connector located at the bottom part of theEB401 or EB501 module.

2. Connect an ER bus cable to both sides of the T-type branch connector. If the corre-sponding ER bus interface module is position at the end, connect a terminal resistor(provided with EB401 : 50 ohm) to one side of the T-type branch connector.

A040333E.EPS

ER bus cable

T-type branch connector

ER bus cable

Terminator

T-type branch connector

Figure ER Bus Cable Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £

3. When the ER bus cable is connected, put the T-type branch connector betweeninsulation sheets to prevent it from touching other metals. The surfaces of the insula-tion sheets that come with the T-type branch connector (2 sheets) are adhesive. Thefigure below shows how to attach them.

• Place two pieces of insulation sheets so that the adhesive surfaces face the T-typebranch connector and sandwich the T-type branch connector between them.

• Press the two pieces of insulation sheets together tightly with your fingers, makingsure that the sheets cover the metal part of the T-type branch connector.

4. Place clamp filters on both sides of the T-type branch connector at positions as closeas possible to the connector. Fix the clamp filters (provided with remote node) to thecables using a tie wrap.

A040334E.EPS

Insulation sheet

T-type branch connector

Figure Insulation Sheet : KFCS2/KFCS £

A040335E.EPS

Clamp FilterTie Wrap

Figure Clamp Filter : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 76: 6C2001

A4-42<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.3.4 Connecting Bus Cables to FFCSThis section describes the connections of the V net, ESB bus and ER bus cables.

IMPORTANT

When wiring the V net cable for V net coupler unit, note the following:

• Always connect “Bus 1 to Bus 1” and “Bus 2 to Bus 2” of the FFCS. Do not connect“Bus 1 to Bus 2” and “Bus 2 to “Bus 1.”

• When the V net connection becomes an end terminal for the station, install a V netterminator on the unwired connection port of the V net branch connector.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 77: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-43

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

■ Connecting V net Cable : FFCS £How to connect V net cable is explained as follows.

The 10BASE-2 type cable is used as the V net cable. The V net branch connector for V netcoupler is connected to BNC connector.

The connecting of V net for a human interface station (HIS) and a field control unit is shownas follows:

A040336E.EPS

To next device(Install a terminator if the connection end)

From another node

Bus 2 Bus 2

Bus 1 Bus 1

PRINTERRS-232C-A

(COM2)

EXTRS-232C-B

(COM1)SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 SLOT7

HIS rear

V net cable(10BASE-2)

Field control unit

CN2(CPU-L)

CN3(CPU-R)

CN1 ENBL

DSBL

CN2(CPU-L)

CN3(CPU-R)

TM1READY

FUSE RL1

CN1 ENBL

DSBL

CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC � L N

CN2 (PSU-R)

Figure Connecting of V net Cable : FFCS £

Page 78: 6C2001

A4-44<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

● Connecting V net Cable : FFCS £

1. Turn the communication switch on V net coupler unit into DSBL position.

2. Connect the T-type V net branch connector for V net coupler unit to BNC connector.For dual-redundant V net, both bus1 and bus2 should be connected.

3. After connecting the V net cable, put a black silicone rubber cover over it.

(Silicone rubber cover is a component of FFCS accessories. Part number : T9070UQ)

4. Turn the communication switch on V net coupler unit into ENBL position.

A040337E.EPS

V net cable

V net coupler unit

T-type V net branch connector

Communication switch

Cover

Figure Connecting V net Cable : FFCS £

Page 79: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-45

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

■ Connecting V net Coupler Cable : FFCS £A V net coupler cable is used to link the V net coupler unit and processor module. Twomodular connectors with keys are used on each side of the cable. Connect the connectorsas illustrated in the following drawing. However, following drawing shows a dual-redundantsystem. If the processor is single, CN3 will not be used.

• Use the bus1 cable to connect CN2 of coupler unit to BUS1 connector on left sideprocessor module.

• Use the bus1 cable to connect CN3 of coupler unit to BUS1 connector on right sideprocessor module.

• Use the bus2 cable to connect CN2 of coupler unit to BUS2 connector on left sideprocessor module.

• Use the bus2 cable to connect CN3 of coupler unit to BUS2 connector on right sideprocessor module.

The connecting route is shown in the following figure. The cable can be pulled through thecorner hole of cable tray.

SEE ALSO

For more information about connecting and disconnecting the V net coupler cable, see the following:

“■ Replacing Processor Module : FFCS £” in A7.5.1, Replacing Common Modules

“■ Replacing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £” in A7.5.1, Replacing Common Modules

A040338E.EPS

Cable between V net coupler unit and processor module

Corner hole of cable tray

V net coupler cable

V net cable

Bus 1 (left side)coupler unit

CN2 CN3

Bus 2 (right side)coupler unit

CN2 CN3

BUS1

BUS2

BUS1

BUS2

Left side processor module

Right side processor module

Figure V net Coupler Cable Route : FFCS £

Page 80: 6C2001

A4-46<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Using the Control bus Converter Unit : FFCS £V net cable (10BASE-2) and V net cable (10BASE-5) can be connected via the control busconverter unit (YCB149).

However, the weight and the strength of the cables are various, the control bus converterunit needs to be fixed firmly.

• To fix the control bus converter unit as close as possible to the V net connector so asto reduce the load of the bus.

• To fix the control bus converter unit somewhere near FFCS or HIS above the floorlevel so as to make maintenance convenient.

• Do not fix the control bus converter unit to the place where people may pass by.

An example of control bus converter unit installation is shown below.

V net cable (10BASE-5)

FFCS

Under floor level

A040339E.EPS

V net branch connector

Control bus converter unit

Fixed

V net cable (10BASE-2)

Figure Using the Control bus Converter Unit : FFCS £

Page 81: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-47

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Connecting ESB Bus Cable : FFCS £How to install ESB bus coupler module to the field control unit and how to connectESB node unit (local node) are explained in this chapter.

● ESB Bus : FFCS £

The communication bus to link the field control unit and the local nodes unit is referred to asESB bus. The field control unit is always at one end of the bus. The branch connector of theESB bus coupler module is provided with a terminator. At the other end of the ESB bus, thisterminator should be put on the branch connector. For the node units in between the twoends, ESB bus branch connectors can be used for connection. A drawing of ESB busconnection is shown as follows.

A040340E.EPS

Bus1

ESB bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant)

Bus 2

Bus 2

To next node

Bus 1

ANB10D (local node)

Field control unit

Connector unit for ESB bus(S9879UK)

Connector unit with terminator for

ESB bus (S9880UK)

ESB bus cable (YCB301)

Screw tightening torque: 0.3 N•m

ESB bus coupler module (EC401)

SB401 with connector unit for ESB bus (S9879UK)

ESB bus branch connector

Figure ESB Bus Connection : FFCS £

Page 82: 6C2001

A4-48<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

■ Connecting ER Bus Cable : FFCS £

SEE ALSO

For more information about connecting ER bus cables, see the following:

“■ Connection ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A4.3.3, “Connecting the Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCS”

Page 83: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-49

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.4 V net ConversionThe length of V net cable (10BASE-2) is limited to 185 meters between the devices.However, this distance can be extended to 500 meters by using 10BASE-5 cable.How to use 10BASE-5 cable is explained as follows.

■ Using the Control bus Conversion AdapterControl bus adapter (Model : YCB147) is an adapter for connecting the V net cable(10BASE-5) with V net cable (10BASE-2).

An BNC type connector is provided on one side of YCB147. The V net cable (10BASE-2)from HIS may be connected on this connector.

The other side of YCB147 is provided with N type connector, the V net cable (10BASE-5)may be connected on this connector.

It is required to install the clamp filters to V net cables.

A040401E.EPS

BNC-type connector

N-type connector

V net cable(10BASE-2)

V net cable(10BASE-5)

Figure Adapter for Connecting the V net Cable (10BASE-2) with V net Cable (10BASE-5)

10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00

Page 84: 6C2001

A4-50<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A4.5 Connecting a Cable to Contact OutputThis section describes how to connect a cable to contact output of PFCS/SFCS ,LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and FFCS.

CAUTION

• All equipment connected to a contact output, including the signal wires, junctionterminals, relays, and power supply unit, should comply with CSA 1010 or CSA 950(for a 100-120 V AC power supply), or EN 61010-1 (for a 220-240 V AC power sup-ply).

• When performing wiring for the READY output terminals, attach the clamp filter (partNo. A1193MN, included in accessories) near the terminals. The clamp filter is suppliedwith CE Mark-certified LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS of both rack mountable typesand cabinet types.

• The cable connected to the READY (processor status contact output) terminalsshould run at least 1 cm from other signal cables since a high voltage is applied to it.

Each field control station (an PFCS/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and FFCS) moni-tors its own processor status. Upon detection of a failure, it outputs a system alarm andopens the output contact. This break (normally closed) contact is labeled as READY, and isopened in the following cases:

• When the CPU stops control.

• Duplexed CPUs, when both CPUs stop control.

• When the power supply fails.

• Duplexed power supplies, when both power supplies fail.

Make sure of the following when using the contact output:

• Avoid applying an AC voltage directly to the contact output terminal. Use a voltage lessthan the rated.

• When this contact directly drives an external relay or the like, use a spark killer toprotect the relay contact.

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 85: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-51

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Contact Output Wiring : PFCS/SFCSThe figures below show the contact output terminals of a PFCS/SFCS and an example ofusing a spark killer.

A040501E.EPS

TM1 READY

Contact output terminals

Figure Contact Output Unit : PFCS/SFCS

A040502E.EPS

Spark killer

24 V DC

External relay

READY contact

Contact rating: 300 mA or less at 30 V DC

Figure Use of Spark Killer : PFCS/SFCS

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 86: 6C2001

A4-52<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Contact Output Wiring : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● Rack Mountable Type : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

The figures below show the contact output terminals of a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS and an example of using a spark killer.

A040503E.EPS

READY

TM1

FUSE

RL1 RL2FAN ALARM

N1 N2

Clamp filter

Contact output terminals

Figure Contact Output Terminals (on External Interface Unit) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

A040504E.EPS

24 V DC

Spark killerExternal relay

READY contact

Figure Use of Spark Killer : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 87: 6C2001

<A4. Cable Connections> A4-53

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Contact Output Wiring £

● LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet Type : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS£

The figures below show the contact output terminals of an LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSwith cabinet and an example of using a spark killer.

A040505E.EPS

Contact output terminals

Figure Contact Output Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Contact

Inductive load such as solenoid valve

Contact Protection by Diode

Contact Protection by CR Circuit

Power supply

Contact

Power supply

Inductive load

A040506E.EPS

External circuitLFCS

Figure Use of Spark Killer : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 88: 6C2001

A4-54<A4. Cable Connections>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Contact Output Wiring : FFCS £The figures below show the contact output terminals of a FFCS and an example of using aspark killer.

A040507E.EPSContact output terminal

TM1READY

FUSE RL1 CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC �

CN2 (PSU-R)

L N

Figure Contact Output Terminal : FFCS £

A040508E.EPS

Spark killer

24 V DC

External relay

READY contact

Contact rating: 0.3A or less, 30 V DC or less

Figure Use of Spark Killer : FFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 89: 6C2001

<A5. Operations and Setups> A5-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A5. Operations and SetupsThis chapter describes the operations and setups of a FCS.

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 90: 6C2001

A5-2<A5. Operations and Setups>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A5.1 Setting Up UnitsThis section describes setting of switches of FCS units.

■ Setting Up PFCS Units : PFCS/SFCSWhen replacing units, follow the instructions below if the unit has setting elements, such asdip switches and toggle switches:

• Processor cardAdjust the station address (station number) before replacement.

• Battery unit:Turn on the battery switch after installing the unit to the PFCS/SFCS.

• Control bus coupler unit:Install the control bus coupler unit with the communication switch set to DSBL, andturn the switch to ENBL after installation.

The table below shows a list of setting elements.

SEE ALSO

For how to set the station address for the set processor card, see the following:

A6.1, “Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCS”

Table List of Setting Elements : PFCS/SFCS

Unit Name Setting ItemNormal Position of

Toggle Switch

Processor Station address —

Battery Battery switch (ON/OFF) ON

Control bus coupler Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) ENBL

A050101E.EPS

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 91: 6C2001

<A5. Operations and Setups> A5-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setup of Each Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Some cards and units have setup switches. When replacing a card or unit with a spare,make the following setups:

• Processor cardSet up the station address (domain and station numbers) on the spare card beforereplacing it.

• Power supply unitTurn on the battery switch after installing the unit in the FCU.

• V net coupler unitLeave the communication switch of the spare V net coupler unit set to DSBL beforeand during installation. Set it to ENBL after installing the unit.

• RIO bus coupler unit (*1)Leave the communication switch of the spare RIO bus coupler unit set to DSBL beforeand during installation. Set it to ENBL after installing the unit.

• ESB bus interface module(*2)Before replacing the module, the dipswitch of the IP address and synchronizationmode should be correctly set.

*1 : LFCS2/LFCS*2 : For models AFS30D, AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40D

The table below lists the setup items.

Table Setup of Each Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Setup ItemCard (Unit) Normal Position of Toggle Switch

Station address (domain and station numbers) -

-

Battery switch (ON/OFF) ON

Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) ENBL

Processor

Power supply unit

V net coupler

RIO bus coupler (*1)

ESB bus interface master module(*2)

Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL)

Dip switch (for setting IP address and synchronization mode)

ENBL

A050102E.EPS

*1 : LFCS2/LFCS*2 : For models AFS30D, AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40D

SEE ALSO

• For the respective setup procedure, see the following:

A6.2, “Functions of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS”

• For how to set up the station address on a processor card, the following:

A6.2.6, “Processor Card in FCU”

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 92: 6C2001

A5-4<A5. Operations and Setups>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

■ Setup of Each Unit : FFCS £When a module or a unit is replaced or exchanged, the dipswitches or the toggle switcheson the module or the unit need to be adjusted accordingly. The details are shown as follows:

• Processor Card

The Station Address (Domain Number, Station Numbers) of the new card should be thesame as the settings on the replaced card.

• V Net Coupler

The communication switch of the V net coupler should be kept on DSBL position duringinstallation. And then it should be switched to ENBL position after the installation.

• ESB Bus Interface Module

When the module is replaced with a new one, the dipswitches for the node number shouldbe correctly set.

• ER Bus Interface Module

When the module is replaced with a new one, the dipswitches for the IP address should becorrectly set.

The settings are detailed in the table below:

Table Setup of Each Unit : FFCS £

Setupmodule or Unit Normal Position of Toggle Switch

Station address (domain and station numbers) -

-

Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) ENBL

Processor module

V net coupler unit

ESB bus interface module ESB bus address (node number)

-ER bus interface slave module IP address (node number)

A050103E.EPS

SEE ALSO

For more information about settings of dipswitches and toggle switches, see the following:

A6.3 “Configuration and Functions of Each Unit in FFCS”

Page 93: 6C2001

<A5. Operations and Setups> A5-5

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

A5.2 Turning On/Off the PowerThis section describes the procedure to turn on and off the power supply to LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet, using the flow chart.

■ Turning On/Off the Power : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £In an LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet, you will find a circuit breaker on the mainpower distribution board.

This circuit breaker turns on/off the power to the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and all nodesin the cabinet. To turn on/off the power to the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS only, connectand disconnect the cable connector from the power unit in the upper front of the cabinet.

Turning on/off the power causes the alarm buzzer to sound and a message to be displayedat a HIS connected on the same V net.

A050201E.EPS

I

O

TM1

I

O

TM1

Circuit breaker Circuit breaker

Figure Main Power Distribution Unit (for Dual Power Supply) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

WARNING

There is no power switch on the power distribution board of a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS or PFCS/SFCS. Provide a separate switch or breaker for turning on/off the power.

Page 94: 6C2001

A5-6<A5. Operations and Setups>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Turning On/Off Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £The steps to turn on and off the FCS (with cabinet) power supply are explained.

The flow chart explains the steps to turn on and off the power supply.

When the power supply is turned on or off, a system alarm is indicated on the window ofthe HIS which is connected via VL net or V net, and a corresponding message appears atthe same time.

When the FCS (with cabinet) power supply is turned on, the green RDY lamp of each cardor unit turns on.

A050202E.EPS

Steps to turn on the power supply

Confirm the switch setting on the front side of the unit.

Turn on the external power supply switch.

Are the contents of the FCS

memory volatile?

Operation status

NO

YES

Download the FCS

database.

Steps to turn off the power supply

Turn off the battery on/off switch.

Turn off the external power supply switch.

Has the power supply been turned off for longer than 72 hours?

End

Confirm that the battery on/off switch is turned on.

Is it necessary to save the FCS tuning parameters?

NO

YES

YES

NO

Save the FCS tuning parameters.

Before turning off the power supply, it is recommended to save the tuning parameters even if the power supply has been turned off for less than 72 hours.

Figure Steps to Turn ON/OFF the Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 95: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCSThis chapter describes the functions and setup of each unit and card composing aFCS.

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 96: 6C2001

A6-2<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.1 Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCSThis section introduces the functions of each unit composing a PFCS/SFCS, and themeanings of the statuses of indicator lamps on each card.

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 97: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.1.1 Power Distribution Board of PFCS/SFCSThe power distribution board receives a specified power supply at the power supplyinput terminals, and outputs it through a noise filter to the power supply outputconnectors.

● Configuration : PFCS/SFCS

There is no power switch on the PFCS/SFCS. Prepare a separate power switch or circuitbreaker.

To turn off the power to the cards, disconnect the power supply output connectors (CN1and CN2) on the power distribution board.

• TM1 terminals:M4 screw terminals for power supply input

L : UngroundedN : GroundedProtective grounding terminal : Ground

• CN1 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the left-side power supply unit of a duplexed FCU.

• CN2 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the right-side power supply unit

A060101E.EPS

CN1(PSU-L) CN2(PSU-R)

STATION ADDRESS COMPONENT NO.

DOMEIN NO. STATION NO.

TM1

L

N

100~120VAC~

Power supply input terminals

Power supply output connector (for right-side power supply unit)

Power supply output connector (for left-side power supply unit)

Figure Power Distribution Board : PFCS/SFCS

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 98: 6C2001

A6-4<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.1.2 Power Supply Unit of PFCS/SFCSThis unit supplies power to the common part of the PFCS/SFCS.

● RDY Lamp : PFCS/SFCS

The green status-display lamp (RDY lamp) turns on when the power unit is operatingnormally.

It turns off when the power failure occurs or when the unit is operating abnormally.

IMPORTANT

The maintenance connector (CHK) is used by a service engineer during maintenancework.

A060102E.EPS

: Power ON: Power OFF

RDY lamp

Maintenance connector (CHK)

Handle

ON/OFF switch

Power supply cable

To the connector on the power distribution board

Figure Power Supply Unit : PFCS/SFCS

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 99: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-5

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.1.3 Battery Unit of PFCS/SFCSThe battery unit is used for backing up the main memory of the processor card whenpower failure occurs.

CAUTION

Use batteries specified by Yokogawa Electric.

The part number of battery pack is S9765UK.

SEE ALSO

For how to replace the battery unit, see the following:

A7.3.4, “Battery Unit Replacement Procedure”

● Battery Back-up Specifications : PFCS/SFCS

• Backup time : Up to 72 hours

• Battery life : Varies depending on ambient temperature3 years at 30 deg C or less1.5 years at 40 deg C or less9 months at 50 deg C or less

As for battery output, the left battery unit backs up the left CPU and the right battery unit theright CPU.

In the single system, the battery unit is installed on the left side.

ON

OFF

CPUBACKUP

’08.12

A060103E.EPSBattery life label

Battery life label

Screw for attaching battery pack assembly

Figure Battery Unit and Battery Life Label : PFCS/SFCS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 100: 6C2001

A6-6<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

A6.1.4 Processor Card of PFCS/SFCSProcessor card performs control operations.

This section describes the procedure to set the domain number and station numberwith the DIP switches located at the front of the processor card.

There are two types of processor cards:

• CP701 Standard type (*1)

• CP703 Enhanced type (*1), Compact type

When abnormality is detected in the CPU or power supply unit, contact signals are outputfrom the READY terminal of the contact output unit.

*1: ¡ For CS 1000 only CP701 standard type and CP703 enhanced type are available.

■ Configuration : PFCS/SFCS

● Status Lamps : PFCS/SFCS

• HRDY:The processor card performs self diagnosis. If the processor card is normal, the greenlight turns on. If abnormality is found, the light turns off.

• RDY:The green light turns on if both the hardware and software are normal. If either of themis abnormal, the light turns off.

• CTRL:In the duplex PFCS/SFCS, the green light turns on if the processor card is the controlside and turns off if it is the standby side. When starting up the duplex PFCS/SFCS,the right side becomes the control side. In the single PFCS/SFCS, the green light isalways on.

• COPY:In the duplex PFCS/SFCS, the green light turns on when program copy is executedand turns off when program copy is completed.When a processor card has been replaced or when the unit is stopped then startedagain, the standby side processor card automatically copies the program of thecontrol side processor card. When copy is completed, the light turns off.In the single PFCS/SFCS, the light is always off.

• START/STOP:This maintenance switch is used for forcing stop or restarting the processor card CPU.If this switch is pressed when the processor card is still operating, the CPU will stop.If this switch is pressed when the processor card is not operating, the CPU will restart.This switch is located inside a hole next to the START/STOP sign.Push the switch using a slender bar of around 2 mm in diameter.

● CN1 Connector : PFCS/SFCS

Do not connect anything to the CN1 connector, since it is used for maintenance purposesonly.

Page 101: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-7

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

HRDYRDY

CTRLCOPY

CN1

START/STOP

STATIONADDRESS

0 1

PARTY

0 1

PARTY

A060104E.EPS

CTRL lamp

CN1 connector

Used for setting the domain number

DIP switches used for setting the station address

Used for setting the station number

COPY lamp

START/STOP switch

HRDY lampRDY lamp

Figure Processor Card

Page 102: 6C2001

A6-8<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setting the Domain Number : PFCS/SFCSA domain is a range of stations that are linked by a single VL net system.

In a single system, the domain number is set to “1.”

Unless specified, the DIP switch is shipped with all the bits OFF.

Set the domain number between 1 and 16. Necessary domain numbers can be set bychanging the DIP switch settings as shown in the table.

The DIP switches corresponding the bit numbers 2 and 3 are always “0.”

A060105E.EPS

MSB: Most Significant BitLSB: Least Significant Bit

Parity of the domain number (1 bit) (odd parity)

Fixed to 0 (2 bits)

Domain number (5 bits)

Figure Domain Number Setting DIP Switches : PFCS/SFCS

Table Domain Numbers and Switch Settings : PFCS/SFCS

Domain number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

A060106E.EPS

Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.

10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00

Page 103: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-9

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setting the Station Number : PFCS/SFCSSet station number specified following range.

• Within the range of 1 to 24 (*1)

• Within the range of 1 to 64 (*2)

*1: ¡ In case of CS 1000*2: £ In case of CS 3000Necessary station numbers can be set by changing the DIP switch settings as shown in thetable below:

A060107E.EPS

MSB : Most Significant Bit (highest-order bit)LSB : Least Significant Bit (lowest-order bit)

Station number parity (1-bit) (odd parity)

Station number (7-bit)

Figure Station Number Setting DIP Switches : PFCS/SFCS

Table Station Numbers and Switch Settings : PFCS/SFCS

Station number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

12 13 14 15 16

1 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 0

0 1 0 1 0

60 61 62 63 64

1 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 1

1 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 0

0 1 0 1 0

Station number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Bit 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

A060108E.EPS

Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.

10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00

Page 104: 6C2001

A6-10<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

A6.1.5 Control Bus Coupler UnitThe control bus coupler is located between the control bus cable and the PFCS/SFCS processor card, and performs insulation and level conversion of control bussignals.

Either a single or duplex control bus coupler can be used.

In the duplex system, two coupler units are used. In this case, Bus 1 is on the left side.

● Status Lamps : PFCS/SFCS

• RCV:The green light turns on when the communication carrier is receiving signals fromcontrol bus.Otherwise, the lamp is off.

• SND-L:The green light turns on when the processor card located on the left side of the PFCS/SFCS is sending data to control bus. Otherwise, the light is off.

• SND-R:The green light turns on when the processor card located on the right side of thePFCS/SFCS is sending data to control bus. Otherwise, the light is off.

When the communication switch is tilted toward the DSBL side, all lamps are off.

CN

1

CN

2

ENBL

DSBL

A060109E.EPS

RCV

NS

DL R

NS

D

BUS1

SND-R lamp

SND-L lamp

RCV lamp

Communication switch

Figure Control Bus coupler unit : PFCS/SFCS

■ Setting Elements : PFCS/SFCS

● Communication Switch : PFCS/SFCS

• ENBL:Performs communication with control bus. Set the switch in this position during normaloperation.

• DSBL:Set the switch in this position if communication with control bus is to be stopped.

A lock-type switch is used for the toggle switch.

When switching, do so while pulling the knob forward.

Tilt the switch upward to obtain the ENBL setting and downward to obtain the DSBL setting.

Page 105: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-11

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A6.2 Functions of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSThis section introduces the functions of each unit composing an LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS, and the meanings of the statuses of indicator lamps on each card.

Page 106: 6C2001

A6-12<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.1 Power Distribution Board of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSThe power distribution board receives a specified power supply at the power supplyinput terminals, and outputs it through a noise filter to the power supply outputconnectors.

● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

There is no power switch on the rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS. Prepare aseparate power switch or circuit breaker.

To turn off the power to the cards, disconnect the power supply output connectors (CN1and CN2) on the power distribution board.

• TM1 terminals:M4 screw terminals for power supply input

L : UngroundedN : GroundedProtective grounding terminal : Ground

• CN1 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the left-side power supply unit of a duplexed FCU.

• CN2 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the right-side power supply unit.

TM1 L N100-120VAC~

CN2(PSU-R)

CN1(PSU-L)

A060201E.EPS

Power supply output connector (for left-side power supply unit)

Power supply output connector (for right-side power supply unit)

Power supply input terminals

Figure Power Distribution Board of Rack Mountable : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 107: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-13

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.2 Power Distribution Boards of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSwith CabinetAn LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet has a main power distribution board,nest power distribution board, FCU power distribution board and node power distri-bution board.

■ Main Power Distribution Board : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £The main power distribution board receives a specified power supply and distributes it,through a circuit breaker and noise filter, to nest power distribution boards in the front andtwo node power distribution boards in the rear. The power supply output terminals areprovided on the rear panel of the main power distribution board.

● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• TM1 terminals:M6 screw terminals for power supply inputL UngroundedN Grounded

• Circuit breakerTurns on/off the power to the entire cabinet.Toggling up the switch arm of the circuit breaker turns on the power.Toggling down the switch arm of the circuit breaker turns off the power.(There are two breakers in case of dual power supply.)

• Contact output unit:Provides an output contact representing a failure of the FCU’s processor card.

Front RearA060202E.EPS

Circuit breaker Contact output unit

Power supply input terminals Power supply input terminals

Power supply output terminals

Figure Main Power Distribution Board (for Dual Power Supply) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 108: 6C2001

A6-14<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Nest Power Distribution Boards : LFCS2/LFCS £Nest power distribution boards distribute the power to the power supply unit(s) of the FCUand nodes on the front side of the cabinet.

● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £

There is an identical nest power distribution board on the left and right of the FCU in theupper front of the cabinet. Each nest power distribution board distributes the power to boththe FCU and nodes in the front side of the cabinet. The standard configuration can be usedfor either single or dual power supply.

If the power supply to the cabinet is single, connect the power cable from the main powerdistribution board to the nest power distribution board on the right (when looking at thecabinet from the front).

• CN1 (FCU) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the FCU

• CN2 (NIU1) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 1 node (in F1)

• CN3 (NIU2) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 2 node (in F2)

• CN4 (NIU3) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 3 node (in F3)

R

CN2(NIU1)

CN3(NIU2)

CN4(NIU3)

L N

A060203E.EPS

CN1For FCU

CN2For No. 1 node (F1)

CN3For No. 2 node (F2)

CN4For No. 3 node (F3)

Input terminals for power supply to nodes

Figure Nest Power Distribution Board (Front) : LFCS2/LFCS £

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 109: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-15

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ FCU Power Distribution Boards : KFCS2/KFCS £FCU power distribution boards distribute the power to the power supply unit(s) of the FCU.

● Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £

There is an identical FCU power distribution board on the right of the FCU in the upper frontof the cabinet. The standard configuration can be used for either redundant or non-redun-dant power supply.

If the power supply to the cabinet is non-redundant type, connect the power cable on theCN2 connector (FCU-R).

• CN1 (FCU-L) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the left side

• CN2 (FCU-R) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the right side

CN1(FCU-L)

CN2(FCU-R)

A060204E.EPS

CN1Power supply output connector (for left-side power supply unit)

CN2Power supply output connector (for right-side power supply unit)

Figure FCU Power Distribution Board : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 110: 6C2001

A6-16<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Node Power Distribution Boards : LFCS2/LFCS £Node power distribution boards distribute the power to the nodes on the rear side of thecabinet.

● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £

There is an identical node power distribution board on the left and right of the FCU in theupper rear of the cabinet. The standard configuration can be used for either single or dualpower supply.

If the power supply to the cabinet is single, connect the power cable from the main powerdistribution board to the node power distribution board on the right (when looking at thecabinet from the rear).

• CN1 (NIU1) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 1 node (in R1)

• CN2 (NIU2) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 2 node (in R2)

• CN3 (NIU3) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 3 node (in R3)

CN1(NIU1)

CN2(NIU2)

CN3(NIU3)

L N

A060205E.EPS

CN1For No. 1 node (R1)

CN2For No. 2 node (R2)

CN3For No. 3 node (R3)

Input terminals for power supply

Figure Node Power Distribution Board (Rear) : LFCS2/LFCS £

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 111: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-17

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Node Power Distribution Boards : KFCS2/KFCS £The KFCS2/KFCS node power distribution boards are used to distribute the power from themain power distribution board to node and FCU power distribution board.

● Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £

Node power distribution board are located on the central part of both front side bus-unit andrear side of cabinet.

• CN1 to CN14 connectors:

CN1/CN2, CN3/CN4 ...CN13/CN14 are the connector for distributing powers to nodes.

• TM1, TM2 terminals:

They are the terminals for connecting the power cables from the main power board.

Power supply input terminal

Power distribution connector(to Node Unit)

A060206E.EPS

Figure Node Power Distribution Board (Front) : KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 112: 6C2001

A6-18<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.3 RIO Bus Distribution UnitRIO bus distribution units are provided in the front and rear sides of an LFCS2/LFCSwith cabinet.

Each RIO bus distribution unit connects up to three nodes to the same RIO bus.

The standard RIO bus distribution unit can be used for either a single or dual RIObus.

● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £

• RIO bus connectors:Cables from up to three NIUs can be connected.

• RIO bus branch connector:Connect RIO bus cables or install terminators.

A060207E.EPS

RIO bus connectors (2�3 sets) RIO bus branch connector

Figure RIO Bus Distribution Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 113: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-19

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.4 Power Unit in FCUThe power unit in an FCU receives the specified power supply from the power distri-bution board, converts it to an isolated direct-current voltage, and supplies that DCpower to each unit and card in the FCU.

● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• RDY lamp:Lights in green when normal; lights off when failed.

• CHK connector:Used by a service engineer for maintenance.

• Battery unit:For memory backup

RDY

CHK

BATTERYON

OFF

A060208E.EPS

BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)

98. 1,

Attaching screws

RDY lamp

CHK connector (for maintenance)

Battery ON/OFF (toggle) switch

Battery unit

Battery life label

Attaching screws

Cable with connector

Figure Power Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

■ Setting Elements : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £• Battery ON/OFF switch:

Selects whether to back up the contents of the main memory in the processor cardand RIO bus interface card (*1) during a power failure.ON: Enables the backup. Select this position during normal operation.OFF: Disables the backup. The backup time provided by the battery is up to 72

hours. When shutting down the power supply for more than 72 hours, setthe switch to OFF to avoid draining the battery.

This is a locking toggle switch.To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.

*1: Case for LFCS2/LFCS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 114: 6C2001

A6-20<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.5 Battery Unit in FCUThe FCU battery unit backs up the memory in the processor card during a powerfailure.

● Specifications : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• Backup time : Up to 72 hours

• Battery life : Varies depending on ambient temperature3 years at 30 deg C or less1.5 years at 40 deg C or less9 months at 50 deg C or less

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Built into the power supply unit. The output from the battery is converted to 5 V DC in thepower supply unit and connected to the processor card via the back board.

A060209E.EPS

Attaching screw

Battery life label

Connector (connected to the power supply unit)

Battery pack (with connector)

Figure Battery Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 115: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-21

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.6 Processor Card in FCUThe processor card performs control calculations as well as monitors its own CPUand power supply.

Upon detection of a failure, it outputs the alarm from the READY contact outputterminals.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

HRDY:The green lamp turns on if the hardware is found to be normal by the self-diagnostics;otherwise, it turns off.

RDY:The green lamp turns on only if both the hardware and software are normal.

CTRL:The green lamp turns on if the processor card is in service for a duplexed FCU. It turns offin the stand by mode. When the power of a duplexed FCU is turned on, the processor cardon the right side is selected for service.

COPY:The green lamp turns on while the processor card is carrying out the program copy for theduplexed FCU. It turns off upon end of copying.

When a processor card is replaced, or when an off-line load is carried out for starting fromthe stopped state, the processor card in the stand by mode automatically copies the pro-gram from the processor card in service.

● Maintenance Switch : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

START/STOP:Used to forcibly stop and restart the CPU of the processor card. Pressing this switch whilethe CPU is running stops the CPU.

Pressing it while the CPU is stopped starts the CPU. This switch is hidden in the hole nextto the START/STOP label. Use a stick having a 1 to 2 mm diameter tip to press this switch.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 116: 6C2001

A6-22<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

RDY

CTRL

COPY

START/STOP

CN1

V Net ADDRESS

0 1

0 1

ODD PARTY

ODD PARTY

00MSB

MSB

DOMAIN No.

STATION No.

LSB

LSB

A060210E.EPS

HRDY

Attaching screw

Attaching screw

HRDY lamp

RDY lamp

CTRL lamp

COPY lamp

START/STOP switch

CN1 connector (for maintenance)

DIP switches for Vnet station address setting

Setting of domain number

Setting of station number

Figure Processor card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 117: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-23

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setting the Domain Number : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £A domain stands for a range of stations connected by a single train of the V net.

Set the domain number to a value from 1 to 16.

To set a domain number, set the DIP switches as follows.

Bits 2 and 3 must always be zeros (0s).

A060211E.EPS

ODDPARITY

00

MSB

LSB

DOMAINNo.

13

45

67

82

0 1

MSB: Most significant bitLSB: Least significant bit

Odd parity of domain number switches

Domain number of 5 bits

Always 0s

Figure Domain Number Setting Switches : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Table Domain Number and DIP Switch Positions : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Domain No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

A060212E.EPS

Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 118: 6C2001

A6-24<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setting the Station Number : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Set the station number to a value from 1 to 64. To set a station number, set the DIPswitches as follows.

13

45

67

82

A060213E.EPS

ODDPARITY

MSB

LSB

0 1

MSB: Most significant bitLSB: Least significant bit

STATIONNo.

Odd parity of station number switches

Station number

Figure Station Number Setting Switches : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Table Station Number and DIP Switch Positions : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Station No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 8

Station No.

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

17 18 30 31 32 33 60 61 62 63 64

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

A060214E.EPS

Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 119: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-25

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.7 RIO Bus Interface CardThe RIO bus interface card (RB301) performs data communication via the RIO buscoupler unit between multiple nodes connected on the RIO bus.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £

● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS £

• HRDYLit in green if the RIO bus interface card hardware is normal; if not, is not lit.

• RDY:Lit in green only if both the hardware and software are normal.

• CTRL:Lit in green if the RIO card is in service for a duplexed FCU. Is not lit if in the stand-bymode. Always lit in green for a single-processor FCU.

HRDY

RDY

CTRL

A060215E.EPS

Attaching screw

Attaching screw

HRDY lamp

RDY lamp

CTRL lamp

Figure RIO Bus Interface Card : LFCS2/LFCS £

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 120: 6C2001

A6-26<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.8 ESB Bus Interface CardThe ESB bus interface card (SB301) performs data communication via the SB401on node unit for FIO between I/O modules.

■ Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £

● Status Lamps : KFCS2/KFCS £

• RDY:Lit in green only if both the hardware and software are normal.

• CTRL:Lit in green if the SB301 is in service. Is not lit if in the stand-by mode.

A060216E.EPS

RDY lamp

CTRL lamp

CN1 connector

Figure ESB Bus Interface Card : KFCS2/KFCS £

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 121: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-27

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A6.2.9 V net Coupler UnitThe V net coupler unit the processor card installed in the FCU to the V net cable byperforming the signal isolation and signal level conversion.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £For a duplexed FCU, two V net coupler units for duplexed processor (AIP502) are installed.The upper connector is for bus 1, the lower for bus 2.

For a single-processor FCU, two V net coupler units for single processor (AIP501) areinstalled. The upper connector is for bus 1, the lower for bus 2.

● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• RCV:Lit in green when receiving a communication carrier from the V net; is not lit in othercases.

• SND (for AIP501):Lit in green when sending data to the V net; is not lit in other cases.

• SND-L (for AIP502):Lit in green while the processor card in the left side of the FCU is sending data to the Vnet; is not lit in other cases.

• SND-R (for AIP502):Lit in green while the processor card in the right side of the FCU is sending data to theV net; is not lit in other cases.

When the communication switch is set to DSBL (disable), all lamps are off.

A060217E.EPS

AIP502 (for duplexed processor unit) AIP501 (for single processor unit)

RCV

SND

ENBL

DSBL

V Net

CN1

CN2

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

ENBL

DSBL

V Net

CN1

CN2

Attaching screw

Attaching screw

RCV lamp

SND-L lamp

SND-R lamp

Communication switch

Connector assembly

Figure V net Coupler Units : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Page 122: 6C2001

A6-28<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setting Elements : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● Communication Switch : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• ENBL:Enables the V net communication. Leave the switch in this position normally.

• DSBL :Disables the V net communication.This is a locking switch.To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 123: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-29

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.10 RIO Bus Coupler UnitThe RIO bus coupler unit couples the RIO bus interface card installed in the FCU tothe RIO bus by modulating and demodulating the signals.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £For an FCU with duplexed RIO bus, two RIO bus coupler units (AIP511 or AIP512) areinstalled. On the left is for bus 1, and on the right for bus 2. For an FCU with single RIO bus,one RIO bus coupler unit (AIP511 or AIP512) is installed on the left (bus 1).

● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS £

• RCV:The green lamp turns on when receiving a communication carrier from the RIO bus;otherwise, it turns off.

• SND (for AIP511):The green lamp turns on when sending data to the RIO bus; otherwise, it turns off.

• SND-L (for AIP512):The green lamp turns on while the RIO bus interface card in the left side of the FCU issending data to the RIO bus; otherwise, it turns off.

• SND-R (for AIP512):The green lamp turns on while the RIO bus interface card in the right side of the FCUis sending data to the RIO bus; otherwise, it turns off.

When the communication switch is set to DSBL (disable), all lamps will turn off.

RIO Bus

RCV

SNDDSBL

ENBLRIO Bus

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

ENBL

DSBL

AIP511 (for single processor unit. The difference from AIP512 is just the one SND lamp.)

AIP512 (for duplexed processor unit)

A060218E.ESP

Attaching screw

Attaching screw

RCV lampSND-L lampSND-R lamp

Communication switch

Connector unit

Figure RIO Bus Coupler Units : LFCS2/LFCS £

■ Setting Elements : LFCS2/LFCS £

● Communication Switch : LFCS2/LFCS £

This is a locking switch. To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.

For ENBL, toggle up; for DSBL, toggle down.

• ENBL (up):Enables the RIO bus communication. Leave the switch in this position normally.

• DSBL (down):Disables the RIO bus communication.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 124: 6C2001

A6-30<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.11 ESB Bus Coupler UnitThe ESB bus coupler unit couples the ESB bus interface card installed in the FCU tothe ESB bus by modulating and demodulating the signals.

■ Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £For an FCU with duplexed ESB bus, two ESB bus coupler units (AIP532) are installed. Onthe left is for bus 1, and on the right for bus 2. For an FCU with single ESB bus, one ESBbus coupler unit is installed on the left (bus 1).

● Status Lamps : KFCS2/KFCS £

• RCV:Lit in green when receiving a communication carrier from the ESB bus; is not lit inother cases.

• SND-LLit in green while the ESB bus interface card in the left side of the FCU is sending datato the ESB bus; is not lit in other cases.

• SND-RLit in green while the ESB bus interface card in the right side of the FCU is sendingdata to the ESB bus; is not lit in other cases.

When the communication switch is set to DSBL (disable), all lamps are off.

ESB BusCN1

RCV

SND-L

SND-R

REVISION

U H1 H2

Attaching screw

Attaching screw

RCV lampSND-L lampSND-R lamp

ESB bus cable connector

A060219E.EPS

Figure ESB Bus Coupler Units : KFCS2/KFCS £

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 125: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-31

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.12 External Interface Unit of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSThe external interface unit outputs the result of the self-diagnostics by the proces-sor card to the contact output terminals.

An alarm lamp provided for each fan lights in red when the fan speed becomesabnormal.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £• READY terminals:

Open when the processor card fails (or both processor cards fail for a duplexed FCU)or when the power fails.

• FUSERL1: for the READY contact output relayRL2: for the fan speed control relaysN1: for the left fanN2: for the right fan

• LampsN1: Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of

the left fan.N2: Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of

the right fan.

FAN ALARM

FUSE

RL1 RL2

READY

TM1

N1 N2

A060220E.EPS

Fuse for relays

Fuse for fans

Fan status lamps

Contact output terminals

Attaching screws

Figure External Interface Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 126: 6C2001

A6-32<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.13 External Interface Unit of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSwith CabinetThe external interface unit outputs the result of the self-diagnostics by the proces-sor card to the contact output terminals on the power distribution board.

An alarm lamp provided for each of the FCU and door fans lights in red when the fanspeed becomes abnormal.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● FUSE : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

RL1 : for the CPU READY contact relay

RL2 : for the fan speed control relays

RDY RLY : for the RL1 relay of the contact output unit on the main power distribution board

N1 : for the left FCU fan

N2 : for the right FCU fan

D1 : for the left fan on the front door

D2 : for the right fan on the front door

D3 : for the left fan on the rear door

D4 : for the right fan on the rear door

● Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

N1:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the left FCUfan.

N2:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the rightFCU fan.

D1:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the left fanon the front door.

D2:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the right fanon the front door

D3:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the left fanon the rear door

D4:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the right fanon the rear door

FCU

FUSE

FL1 RL2 N1 N2 D1FAN ALARM

D2 D3 D4RDYRLY

CN3

FRONTDOOR

REARDOOR

Fuse for relays

Fuse for fans

Fan status lamps

Connector

Attaching screwsA060221E.EPS

Figure External Interface Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 127: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-33

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.14 Contact Output UnitThe contact output unit, which is provided inside the cabinet for an LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet, receives the CPU ready signal via the external interfaceunit and outputs from the READY terminals.

It also distributes the power supply to the fans on the front and rear doors, andsends the speed status signals output from the fans to the processor via the exter-nal interface unit.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £• RL1 relay: Interposing relay for CPU ready signal

Rated voltage: 250 V AC, 30 V DCRated current: 2 ARated power: 125 VA

• READY terminals:Single-pole double-throw; both the normal-open (NC-C) and normal-close contacts(NO-C) are available for a failure of the power supply unit (failures of processor cardson both sides, or failure of power supply units on both sides for a duplexed FCU). Usea surge absorber when connecting a relay to the READY terminals in order to elimi-nate surge noise.

• CN1 connector:Distributes the power to the fan unit on the rear door and sends the fan speed signalsto the processor.

• CN2 connector:Distributes the power to the fan unit on the front door and sends the fan speed signalsas well as the suction and exhaust air temperature signals to the processor.

• CN3 connector:Connected to the external interface unit of the FCU by a system cable.

A060222E.EPS

CN1: Power supply connector for rear-door fan unit

CN2: Power supply connector for front-door fan unit

CN3: Connector for external interface unit

READY output terminals

RL1 relay

Figure Contact Output Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 128: 6C2001

A6-34<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.15 Fan UnitsUsed to suppress an increase of the temperature inside the cabinet and prevent atemperature increase from causing malfunctions and faster deterioration of theparts in the FCU and nodes.

The fan has two speeds; the high speed is set in the following cases:

• When the suction air temperature increases beyond 35 deg C

• When the exhaust air temperature increases beyond 40 deg C

• When any one of the nest fans and door fans is stopped or the speed of any one fanbecomes abnormal.

If a fan speed drops due to a failure, the corresponding fan status lamp on the externalinterface unit lights in red.

■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Two nest fan units are installed beneath the FCU (rack mountable type LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS).

Two fan units are installed on each of the front and rear doors (LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet).

Air flow direction

A060223E.EPS

1

Nest Fan Unit (no difference from a door fan unit)

Figure Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 129: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-35

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.16 ESB Bus Interface Master Module (with SOE Interface)ESB Bus Interface Master Module (Model SB311) can be installed in FCU. Thismodule is provided with SOE (Sequence Of Events) capability. This module has theinterfaces that support EN-Bus, ESB-Bus, Ethernet, RS-422 (for IRIG-B code input)and RS-232C port (for maintenance). This module can be applied when accessingfrom FCU host CPU to FIO and performs as a communication master when access-ing from SOE server to FIO. However, SB311 can be applied only in AFS30D,AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40 stations.

■ Configuration: KFCS2/KFCS £

● Status Lamps: KFCS2/KFCS £

• RDY:The green light turns on when SB311 is in normal status. Otherwise the light turns off.

• CTRL:The green light turns on when SB311 is the control module in dual-redundant configu-ration. If the SB311 is the standby module, the light turns off.

• SRDY:The green light turns on when SB311 is handling SOE signals. Otherwise the lightturns off.

• LINK:The green light turns on when Ethernet link is established.

• ACT:The green light turns on when frames are active on Ethernet. Otherwise the light turnsoff.

• SYNC:The green light turns on when external clock signal is used. Otherwise the light turnsoff.

● Connectors: KFCS2/KFCS £

• CN1: Ethernet communication for SOE master.

• CN2: For maintenance.

• CN3: For eternal clock signal.

● DIP Switches: KFCS2/KFCS £

For setting the IP address and synchronization mode.

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 130: 6C2001

A6-36<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

SYNC

CN3

CN2

CN1

RDYCTRL

SRDY

LINKACT

RDY lamp

CTRL lamp

SRDY lamp

SYNC lamp

LINK lamp

ACT lamp

CN1 connector(For Ethernet communication)

CN2 connector(For maintenance)

CN3 connector(For IRIG-B code input)

DIP switch(For setting IP address and synchronization mode)

A060224E.EPS

Figure SB311 Card : KFCS2/KFCS £

SEE ALSO

For more information about SOE capability of SB311, see the following:

M11, “SEM (Sequence of Events Manager) Function” in Part M “Options” of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 131: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-37

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setting IP Address : KFCS2/KFCS £When using SB311, the IP address needs to be set.

• The IP address can be set using the front DIP switches.

• A private address should be reserved beforehand.

• Two types, A and B, of addresses need to be prepared. Though the two addresseshave the same usage, they can be used for different users. (For an example, the left-hand side SB311 uses A address and right-hand side SB311 uses B address.)

Table Setting IP Address : KFCS2/KFCS £

A060225.EPS

Bit Number Description Setting on SB311

1

2

3

4

5 to 8

Parity for Bit 2 to 8The number of bits at 1 position should be anodd number.

Unused Always 0

Private 0 stands for Private

Private Address A or BLeft and right in the same station.0 : Private address A for left-hand side. 1 : Private address B for right-hand side.

Lower 4 bits for IP address Lower 4 bits for IP address

A060226E.EPS

12

34

56

78

1

2

4

8

0 1

PARITY

LOWER

A B

PRIVATE

SEL

bit 4 : Set this bit to 0 on left-hand side SB311 Set this bit to 1 on right-hand side SB311 5 to 8: IP address setting

Figure DIP switches Positions : KFCS2/KFCS £

This figure indicates how to use bits 5 to 8 of the DIP switches to set the IP address into192.168.0.20. The setting becomes valid only after the interface unit is restarted.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 132: 6C2001

A6-38<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

DIP switches positions are listed in the following tables. The required IP address can be setwith these dipswitches accordingly.

Table IP Addresses and Positions of DIP switches : KFCS2/KFCS £

SW11

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

SW3

A060227E.EPS

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address A

Private Address B

PA

RIT

Y

Alw

ays

0SW2

Address Bits

DIP SW Positions

SW4 SW5 SW7SW6 SW8

P/U A/B 8 4 2 1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

Private Address B

Private Address B

Private Address B

Private Address B

Private Address B

Private Address B

Private Address B

Private Address B

Private Address B

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

192. 168. 0. 16

192. 168. 0. 17

192. 168. 0. 18

192. 168. 0. 19

192. 168. 0. 20

192. 168. 0. 21

192. 168. 0. 22

192. 168. 0. 23

192. 168. 0. 24

192. 168. 0. 25

192. 168. 0. 144

192. 168. 0. 145

192. 168. 0. 146

192. 168. 0. 147

192. 168. 0. 148

192. 168. 0. 149

192. 168. 0. 150

192. 168. 0. 151

192. 168. 0. 152

192. 168. 0. 153

1 1 0 Private Address A

0 1 0 Private Address B

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

192. 168. 0. 26

192. 168. 0. 154

0 1 1 Private Address A

1 1 1 Private Address B

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

192. 168. 0. 27

192. 168. 0. 155

1 1 0 Private Address A

0 1 0 Private Address B

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

192. 168. 0. 28

192. 168. 0. 156

0 1 1 Private Address A

1 1 1 Private Address B

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

192. 168. 0. 29

192. 168. 0. 157

0 1 0 Private Address A

1 1 0 Private Address B

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

192. 168. 0. 30

192. 168. 0. 158

1 1 1 Private Address A

0 1 1 Private Address B

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

192. 168. 0. 31

192. 168. 0. 159

Type IP Address

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 133: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-39

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.2.17 IRIG-B CouplerIRIG-B Coupler (component number S9039FA) can be installed in FCU. This compo-nent is used for linking SB311 card to external clock and other FCSs. IRIG-B coupleris necessary when using SB311 card.

■ Composition of IRIG-B Coupler

● Connectors

• CN1: For connecting to CN3 connector of the SB311 card installed to the left-handside of FCU.

• CN2: For connecting to CN3 connector of the SB311 card installed to the right-handside of FCU.

● Terminal Blocks

• TM1(1,2) : For connecting to other FCS. If the coupler is at the end of the connectioncable, a termination resister YCB128 should be connected.

• TM1(4,5) : For connecting to external clock signal (GPS unit) or other FCS.

• TM1(3,6) : For connecting to SG (Signal Ground).

CN1 CN2 TM1

TM1RX+ RX- SG

RX+ RX- SG

1 2 3

4 5 6

CN1 connector CN2 connector TerminalA060228E.EPS

Figure IRIG-B Coupler (Component Number S9039FA)

SEE ALSO

For more information about IRIG-B coupler, see the following :

M11.2.1, “Hardware Setup” in Part M “Options” of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007ß-00

Page 134: 6C2001

A6-40<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.3 Configuration and Functions of Each Unit inFFCSIn this chapter, settings, displays and the capabilities of the modules and unitsconfigured for a field control unit are explained.

• External Interface Unit

• Power Supply Module

• Processor Module

• V net Coupler Unit

• ESB Bus Coupler Module (EC401)

• ESB Bus Interface Module (SB401)

• ER Bus Interface Master Module (EB401)

• ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501)

10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00

Page 135: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-41

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.3.1 External Interface UnitThe external interface unit has terminals for connecting the specified power supply,and distributes the power through the output connectors.

■ Configuration : FFCS £The field control unit does not have power switch to turn the power supply on or off.

It is recommended to prepare a separate switch or breaker.

When removing the power output connectors (CN1 or CN2) from the external interface unit,the power supply can be severed.

A060301E.EPS

TM1READY

FUSE RL1 CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC � L N

CN2 (PSU-R)

Fuse for relay power

Contact output terminals

Power input terminals

Power output connectors

Figure External Interface Unit : FFCS £

● Power Input Terminals : FFCS £

These terminals are used to connect the power supply cables.

• L(+) : Line

• N(-) : Neutral

● CN1 Connector : FFCS £

This is a connector for power output, for connecting the cable of the left side power unit.

● CN2 Connector : FFCS £

This is a connector for power output, for connecting the cable of the right side power unit.

● READY Contact Output (TM1; M4 Screw) : FFCS £

Provides an open signal when the processor module (both modules if dual-redundantlyconfigured) becomes abnormal or power supply fails.

● Fuse : FFCS £

The fuse for the power supply of READY output relay.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 136: 6C2001

A6-42<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

A6.3.2 Power Supply ModuleA power supply module is connected to a 100 to 120V AC or 220 to 240V AC or 24VDC main source and supplies insulated +5V and +24V to each installed I/O modulethrough the back board. The +5V and +24V outputs support dual-redundant insu-lated output operation.

■ Configuration : FFCS £

A060302E.EPS

Power supply module

LN

Power supply input terminal (AC)

Grounding terminal

Check terminal

Status lamp

Power supply input terminal (24V DC)�

POWER

CHECK

GND

+5V

+24V

SYS

FLD

Figure Power Supply Module : FFCS £

● Power Input Terminal : FFCS £

This terminal receives the specified power supply voltage. It is delivered with a powersupply cable attached.

• L (�) : Line

• N (�) : Neutral

• Grounding terminal: For grounding

SEE ALSO

For more information about removing power supply module,see the following:

“■ Relpacing Power Supply Module : FFCS £” in A7.5.1, Replacing Common Modules

● Status LEDs : FFCS £

• SYS : The lamp is ON when +5V is output properly. Otherwise, the lamp is OFF.

• FLD : The lamp is ON when +24V is output properly. Otherwise, the lamp is OFF.

● Check Terminals : FFCS £

It is possible to measure output voltages of +5V DC and +24V DC using these terminals formaintenance purposes.

Page 137: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-43

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

A6.3.3 Processor ModuleControl algorism calculations are performed in the processor modules.

The processor module has diagnostic capability, when the CPU or power supplyencounters abnormalities, a signal can be output through external interface unit.

■ Configuration : FFCS £The appearance of the processor module, front and rear, is illustrated in the drawing below.

The battery is placed behind the front cover.

The DIP switches for setting domain number and station number are placed at the rear ofthe module. Thus the setting can only be performed by pulling out the module from its slot.

RCV 1 2SND 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTRL COPY

BUS1

BUS2

START/STOPSTART

/STOP BATTERY

BATTERY

ON

OFF

PORT

DOMST A

CN1

CN2

RCV 1 2SND 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTRL COPY

BUS1

BUS2

ON

OFF

10

P

A060303E.EPS

START/STOP switch

Maintenance connector

V net station number setting switch

For domain number

For station number

Rear

V net connectorBus 1

V net connectorBus 2

Battery

LED display

Front Behind front cover

Battery ON/OFF switch

Battery life label

Front setting switch(6-bit dipswitch)

BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)

2007.10

ON OFF

DO

MA

IN N

O.

STA

TIO

N N

O.

00

MS

BL

SB

PM

SB

LS

B

Figure Processor Module Overview : FFCS £

Page 138: 6C2001

A6-44<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

● Battery Unit : FFCS £

The battery unit is used for backing up the main memory of the processor module whenpower failure occurs.

CAUTION

Use batteries specified by Yokogawa Electric.

The part number of battery pack is S9129FA.

A label indicating the expiration date of the battery sticks on the lower part of the processormodule front cover. This expiration date is valid when the ambient temperature is less than30 degree Celsius.

SEE ALSO

For how to replace the battery unit, see the following.

“ ■ Replacing Battery : FFCS £” in A7.5.4, How to replace Parts

● Battery Back-up Specifications : FFCS £

• Backup time : Up to 72 hours

• Battery life : Varies depending on ambient temperature3 years at 30 deg C or less1.5 years at 40 deg C or less9 months at 50 deg C or less

BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)

2007.10 Date of battery life

A060304E.EPS

Figure Battery Life Label : FFCS £

Page 139: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-45

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

● Status Lamps : FFCS £

RCV 1 2SND 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTRL COPY

A060305E.EPSHRDY lamp

RDY lampCTRL lampCOPY lamp

STATUS lamp

RCV lampSND lamp

Figure LED Display : FFCS £

• HRDY:The processor module performs self diagnosis. If the processor module hardware isfunctioning normally, the green light turns on. If abnormality is found, the light turns off.

• RDY:The green light turns on if both the hardware and software are functioning normally. Ifeither of them is abnormal, the light turns off.

• CTRL:In the duplex FFCS, the green light turns on if the processor module is the control sideand turns off if it is the standby side. When starting up the duplex FFCS, the right sidebecomes the control side. In the non-redundant FFCS, the green light is always on.

• COPY:In the duplexed FFCS, the green light turns on when program copy is executed andturns off when program copy is completed.When a processor module has been replaced or when the unit is stopped then startedagain, the standby-side processor module automatically copies the program of thecontrol-side processor module. When copy is completed, the light turns off.In the non-redundant FFCS, the light is always off.

• RCV:

Indicates V net communication status. 1 stands for V net bus1 while 2 stands for V netbus2. When receiving communication frames, the green lamp turns on, otherwise thelamp turns off.

• SND:

Indicates V net communication status. 1 stands for V net bus1 while 2 stands for V netbus2. When sending communication frames, the green lamp turns on, otherwise thelamp turns off.

• STATUS(1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8):

Indicates the processor module status.

Normal : All lamps are off

DOMN : Indicates V net domain number

STA : Indicates V net station number

Page 140: 6C2001

A6-46<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

● Switch : FFCS £

START/STOP

BATTERYON

OFF

PORT

DOMNST A

CN1

A060306E.EPS

START/STOP switch

Maintenance connector

Battery ON/OFF switch

Front setting switch(6-bit DIP switch)

ON OFF

Figure Setting Switch : FFCS £

• START/STOP:This maintenance switch is used for forcing stop or restarting the processor moduleCPU.If this switch is pressed when the processor module is still operating, the CPU willstop.If this switch is pressed when the processor module is not operating, the CPU willrestart.This switch is located inside a hole next to the START/STOP sign.Push the switch using a non conductive slender bar of around 2 mm in diameter.

• Battery ON/OFF switch:Selects whether to back up the contents of the main memory in the processor moduleduring a power failure.ON: Enables the backup. Select this position during normal operation.OFF: Disables the backup. The backup time provided by the battery is up to 72

hours. When shutting down the power supply for more than 72 hours, setthe switch to OFF to avoid draining the battery.

• Front setting (6-bit DIP switch)

PORT: Port for maintenance (In general, set to 0 position).

DOMN: Indicates V net domain number on STATUS lamp when this bit is set to 1position. (In general, set to OFF position).

STA: Indicates V net station number on STATUS lamp when this bit is set to 1position. (In general, set to OFF position).

An example of STATUS LED indication:

If V net domain number or V net station number is set as 5 (10000101).

A060307E.EPS

1

P (MSB) (LSB)

0

1

82 3 4 5 6 7

1 86

If the domain number is set as shown in the right side figure, the lamp displays as follows (the numbered bits are lit):

Figure STATUS Lamp Indication : FFCS £

Page 141: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-47

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

■ Setting the Domain Number : FFCS £A domain stands for a range of stations connected by a single train of the V net.

Set the domain number to a value from 1 to 16.

To set a domain number, set the DIP switches as follows.

Bits 2 and 3 must always be zeros (0s).

A060308E.EPS

P0

0M

SB

LSB

Domain number (5 bits)

0 1

Fixed to 0 (2 bits)

Parity of the domain number (1 bit) (odd parity)

MSB: Most Significant BitLSB: Least Significant Bit

Figure Domain Number Setting Switches : FFCS £

Table Domain Number and DIP Switch Positions : FFCS £

Domain number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

A060309E.EPS

Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.

Page 142: 6C2001

A6-48<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

■ Setting the Station Number : FFCS £Set the station number to a value from 1 to 64. To set a station number, set the DIPswitches as follows.

A060310E.EPS

Station number (7 bit)

Station number parity (1 bit) (odd parity)

MSB : Most Significant Bit (highest-order bit)LSB : Least Significant Bit (lowest-order bit)

PM

SB

LSB

0 1

Figure Station Number Setting Switches : FFCS £

Table Station Number and DIP Switch Positions : FFCS £

Station number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Station number 17 18 30 31 32 33 60 61 62 63 64

Bit 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 4 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit 7 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

Bit 8 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0A060311E.EPS

Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.

Page 143: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-49

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A6.3.4 V net Coupler UnitThe V net coupler unit the processor module installed in the FFCS to the V net cableby performing the signal isolation and signal level conversion.

For a duplexed FFCS, two V net coupler units are installed.

A060312E.EPS

CN2(CPU-L)

CN3(CPU-R)

CN1 ENBL

DSBL

Communication switch

Figure V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £

● Communication Switch : FFCS £

• ENBL (up):Enables the V net communication. Leave the switch in this position normally.

• DSBL (down):Disables the V net communication.

This is a locking switch.To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.

Page 144: 6C2001

A6-50<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A6.3.5 ESB Bus Coupler ModuleESB bus coupler module (Model: EC401) is installed in field control unit and used forcommunicating with the ESB bus interface module (Model: SB401) of local node.This module has one ESB bus port. Dual-redundant bus schemes can be configuredwith the two modules.

■ Configuration : FFCS £

A060313E.EPS

LED display(RCV, SND)

ESB bus connector

EC401

RCV SND

Figure EC401 : FFCS £

● LED Display : FFCS £

• RCV: When receiving ESB bus communication frames from node units, the lampflashes, otherwise the lamp is off.

• SND: When sending ESB bus communication frames to node units, the lamp flashes,otherwise the lamp is off.

● ESB Bus Connector : FFCS £

The ESB bus connector is connected to an ESB bus branch connector shown as thefollowing figure.

ESB bus cable (YCB301) is connected to ESB bus branch connector. ESB bus couplermodule is placed at the end of the ESB bus so that the branch connector with terminatorshould be used.

A060314E.EPS

Connector unit with terminator for ESB bus

ESB bus cable connector

Figure ESB bus Branch Connector : FFCS £

Page 145: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-51

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.3.6 ESB Bus Interface Module (SB401)The SB401 module is the communication module installed on local nodes. It com-municates with an ESB bus coupler module (EC401).

SB401 has one port for an ESB bus; dual-redundant bus operation can be supportedby installing two modules.

■ Configuration : FFCS £

A060315E.EPS

ESB bus address settingDIP switch

LED display(STATUS, SEL, RSP)

ESB bus connector

Figure SB401 : FFCS £

● LED Display : FFCS £

• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normallyand the ESB interface is operating normally, otherwise it is turned off.

• SEL : This LED turns on during data transmission to an I/O module, otherwise it isturned off.

• RSP : This LED turns on during data reception from an I/O module, otherwise it isturned off.

● ESB Bus Connector : FFCS £

The ESB bus connector is connected to an ESB bus branch connector, shown in the figurebelow, via an ESB bus cable (YCB301). At the end of the ESB bus connect the ESB buscable connector to a branch connector with terminator to terminate the ESB bus.

A060316E.EPS

Branch connector for ESB bus

Branch connector with Terminator for ESB bus

Figure ESB bus Branch Connector : FFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 146: 6C2001

A6-52<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

IMPORTANT

When connecting or disconnecting the ESB bus branch connector for a dual-redundantnode unit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.

● ESB Bus Address Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £

When multiple node units are connected to an ESB bus, it is possible to select a node unitto be accessed by setting the node address using these switches.

■ Setting Node Addresses : FFCS £The node addresses on the ESB bus are set using the node address setting switch.

Node numbers on the CENTUM CS 3000 system must be designated in the range from 2to 4.

Node number 1 is reserved for the field control unit.

It is possible to match the required node numbers by setting the DIP switches as shownbelow.

A060317E.EPS

65

43

21

(LSB)

(MSB)

Fixed to 0

MSB : Most Significant BitLSB : Least Significant Bit

Node address parity (1 bit, odd parity)

10

Node address (4 bits)

Figure Node Number Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £

Table Node Number and Switch Positions : FFCS £

Node number 2 3 4

Bit 1 0 1 0

Bit 2 0 0 0

Bit 3 0 0 0

Bit 4 0 0 1

Bit 5 1 1 0

Bit 6 0 1 0

A060318E.EPS1 : ON 0 : OFF

Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.

10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00

Page 147: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-53

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.3.7 ER Bus Interface Master Module (EB401)The EB401 module is used for controlling the ER bus communication. It provides ERbus interface functions for communication between node units.

EB401 has one 10BASE-2 port; it is possible to make the ER bus dual-redundant byinstalling two modules.

■ Configuration : FFCS £

A060319E.EPS

RCV 1SND 1

DXACTSTATUS

CN1

LED display(from the top RCV, SND)(from the left STATUS, ACT, DX)

ER bus cable connector (CN1)

Figure EB401 : FFCS £

● LED Display : FFCS £

• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normallyand the hardware is ready, otherwise it is turned off.

• ACT : When the module is taking control, the lamp turns on. When the module isstandby, the lamp turns off.

• DX : This LED turns on when EB401 is configured for dual-redundant operation,otherwise it turns off.

• SND 1 : This LED turns on during data transmission, otherwise it turns off (it is onlythe "1" digit that actually turns on and off).

• RCV 1 : This LED turns on during data reception, otherwise it turns off (it is only the"1" digit that actually turns on and off).

● ER Bus Cable Connector : FFCS £

This is a 10BASE-2 type BNC connector. It communicates with an EB501 module on theslave side.

CAUTION

• When connecting or disconnecting the ER bus T-type connector for a dual-redundantnode unit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.

• EB401 can not be installed to remote nodes (ANR10S, ANR10D).

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 148: 6C2001

A6-54<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A6.3.8 ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501)The EB501 module is installed on the remote node side and communicates with anER bus interface master module (EB401) of a local node.

EB501 has one 10BASE-2 port; dual-redundant bus operation can be supported byinstalling two modules.

■ Configuration : FFCS £

IP bus address settingDIP switch

Connector for maintenance

LED display(from the left STATUS, SND, RCV)

ER bus cable connector

A060320E.EPS

Figure EB501 : FFCS £

● LED Display : FFCS £

• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normallyand the EB501 module is operating normally, otherwise it turns off.Note that the STATUS LED of an EB501 with wide temperature rangespecification flashes until the operation temperature of the LAN controllerreaches 0 deg. C or higher.

• SND : This LED turns on during data transmission, otherwise it turns off.

• RCV : This LED turns on during data reception, otherwise it turns off.

● ER Bus Cable Connector : FFCS £

This is a BNC connector equivalent to 10BASE-2. It communicates with an EB401 moduleon the master side via Ethernet.

● IP Bus Address Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £

For setting IP address of EB501. The IP address of EB501 is the same as the node numberof EB501.

● Connector for Maintenance : FFCS £

This connector is used for maintenance.

CAUTION

When connecting or disconnecting the ER bus T-type connector for a dual-redundant nodeunit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 149: 6C2001

<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-55

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Setting Node Number : FFCS £In order to use a bus interface module, it is necessary to set the module's “Node Number”.

• “Node Number” can be set by the DIP switches on the front surface of the EB501module.

• Both pre-defined private addresses and user addresses that the user can set freelyare provided.

• Two types of address, A and B, are available. (It is necessary to use either type A or Bconsistently in the same network segment.)

Table Setting IP Address : FFCS £

Bit Number Description

1

2 Unused

5 to 8 IP address (4 bits)

3

4

Parity of pin 2 to pin 8

Private IP / User IP

IP 1 or 2

Always set to 0.

Set 0 if EB501 is on left side, Set 1 if EB501 is on right side.

Node number

The number of 1 among the 8 DIP switches should be an odd number.

EB501 Setting

Private IP: 0

A060321E.EPS

A060322E.EPS

12

34

56

78

1

2

4

8

0 1

PARITY

UPPER

LOWER

A B

USERPRIVATE

SEL

bit 3 : Fixed to 0 (private address) 4 : Set this bit to 0 if EB501 is installed on the left side and 1 if EB501 is installed on the right side. 5 to 8 : Use these bits to specify an individual node number.

(An Example Where the Address “Node Number” 4, left EB501 is Set)

Figure IP Address Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £

Set the address of lower 4 bits using bit numbers 5 to 8.

The settings become valid only after the remote node is restarted.

It is possible to match the required “Node Number” by setting the DIP switches as shownbelow.

Table Node Number and Positions of Setting Switches : FFCS £

DIP Switch setting

SW1

0

1

0

SW3

A060323E.EPS

0

0

0

0

1

0

Private address A

Private address A

Private address A

PA

RIT

Y

SW2 SW4 SW5 SW7SW6 SW8

Lower address

Vac

ant

P/U A/B 8 4 2 1Address selected

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

Private address B

Private address B

Private address B

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Node number

2 (left EB501)

3 (left EB501)

4 (left EB501)

2 (right EB501)

3 (right EB501)

4 (right EB501)

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 150: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 151: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7. Maintenance of FCSThis chapter describes the maintenance precautions and procedures for an FCS,including:

• Indications of abnormalities

• Daily inspections

• Procedures for replacing parts having a limited life that must be replaced, andparts that can be replaced by the user

• Procedure for replacing each unit

CAUTION

• If dust or dirt is found in peripheral devices, clean with a vacuum cleaner or dry softcloth. If the stain is tough and cannot be removed easily, wipe with soft cloth soaked inwater or mild soap water after wringing it tightly.

• When power is ON, do not install or remove the cards, cables, connectors not listed inthis manual.

• During maintenance, put up wrist strap, and take other ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)measures.

• Opening a cabinet door during operation increases the radiation noise; immunityagainst the radiation noise cannot be guaranteed.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 152: 6C2001

A7-2<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.1 Precautions for MaintenanceThis section describes the general precautions for maintaining the FCS hardware.

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 153: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.1.1 Precautions for Static ElectricityNote the following to prevent faults due to static electricity:

• When storing or carrying a maintenance part, put it in an anti-static bag. (Such partsare packed in anti-static bags with a label describing precautions for static electricity,when delivered.)

• During maintenance, wear a wrist strap with grounding wire and ground the wire via a1 M ohm resistor.

• When placing a card with a built-in battery (power supply unit) on a conductive sheet,set the battery switch to OFF or remove the battery.

• When carrying out maintenance at a desk; 1) do it on a conductive sheet that isgrounded via a 1 M ohm resistor, 2) wear a wrist strap, and 3) keep away things whichmay be charged, such as plastic.

• Do not touch maintenance parts without first putting on a wrist strap and placing theparts on a conductive sheet.

• The wrist strap and conductive sheet are available from Yokogawa’s sales agents.

A070101E.EPS

Terminal or un-coated part of cabinet which is grounded

Wrist strap

1M ohm

1M ohm

Wrist strap

Conductive sheet

Grounding resistance of 1 M ohm

When working with a card with battery (powersupply unit) on a conductive sheet, set the BATTERY ON/OFF switch to the OFF positionor remove the battery

Figure How to Handle Cards and Modules

10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00

Page 154: 6C2001

A7-4<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.2 Daily MaintenanceA human interface station (HIS) always monitors the status of each FCS, and uponoccurrence of and recovery from a failure of an FCS, a HIS announces it to the userwith a buzzer sound and display message.

This section describes the daily maintenance for an FCS.

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 155: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-5

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.2.1 Inspection Using FCS Status Display WindowWith FCS status display window of HIS, the operating status of FCS can be checked.

■ FCS Status Display WindowSelect the FCS status display window from a system maintenance window. The controlstation operating status, I/O module status, communication bus status, and other statusescan be checked using the FCS status display window.

We recommend that this window be used not only when trouble occurs, but also to periodi-cally check the operating status of each station.

The figure below shows an example of PFCS status display window.

FCS101Distillation column AStation No : 1 Type : PFCD-E

Revision : R3.08.00Generation : 10/28/2007 20: 57

CPU Idle Time : 57secComn Load Ave : 0% Cur : 0%Test Mode : OFFControlStatus : RUN

I/O (OFF) : Comm I/O : ON

Task Status : Task1 : RUN Task2 : RUN Task3 : RUN Task4 : RUN

AAM10AAM50AAM11AAM11AAM21AAM51APM11AAM10AAM50AAM11AAM11AAM21AAM51APM11AAM10AAM50

21

ADM11C

ADM11C

ADM51C

ADM51C

4

ADM12T

ADM12T

3

ACM11

COM

ACM12

5

AUT

CPU

CPU

PSU

PSU

Not ReadyStand-ByControlHard ReadyMaintenance

MYPJT Domain : 01 VL net1 VL net2

.SF FCS0101 FCS Status DisplayFCS

IOMFCS

READY

A070201E.EPS

I/O moduleVL net statusNormal:Abnormal:

(green)(red)

Digital I/O module (connector type)

Start condition

CPU statusFlashes whiteduring CPU copying

Power supply statusDigital I/O module(terminal type)Communication error

Communication module

I/O module error

Figure PFCS Status Display Window ¡

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 156: 6C2001

A7-6<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A7.2.2 Check of Status Indication Lamps : PFCS/SFCSWith status indication lamps of processor cards, power supply units and control buscoupler, the operation status of each unit can be checked.

■ Status Indication Lamps : PFCS/SFCSProcessor cards, power supply units and control bus coupler in a PFCS/SFCS have statusindication lamps, which represent the operation statuses of the units themselves.

The figure below shows a fully-configured PFCD with an extension rack.

A070202E.EPS

Power supply unit

Processor card

Control bus coupler

Figure Units Having Status Indication Lamp in PFCS/SFCS

SEE ALSO

• For the positions of the lamps on a processor card, see the following:

A6.1.4, “Processor card of PFCS/SFCS”

• If a status indication lamp of a unit fails, contact Yokogawa’s sales agents and take appropriate action.

Page 157: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-7

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

The table below shows the types and meaning of the status lamps on the PFCS/SFCSprocessor cards, power supply units and control bus couplers.

Table The Status Lamps : PFCS/SFCS

Unit name Type of lamp When lamp turn on When lamp turn off Remarks

Processor card

HRDY Normal Abnormal Indicates the card hardware status.

RDY Normal Abnormal or no program Indicates the card status.

CTRL Control status Wait state or abnornalFor dual-redundant FCS, only the lampof one unit comes on.

COPY Copying Normal state Comes only when copying. Normally off.

Power supply unit RDY Normal Abnormal Indicates unit normal output state.

Control bus coupler

RCV Receive Not receiveIn the normal communication state, thelamp is on.

SND-L Send Wait In the communication state, one of thelamps come on.SND-R Send Wait

A070203E.EPS

Page 158: 6C2001

A7-8<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.2.3 Check of Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSThe power supply unit, processor card, RIO bus interface card, V net coupler unit,RIO bus coupler unit, external interface card of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS havestatus indication lamps to show if the operation status of each unit is normal.

■ Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS £Each unit and card in an LFCS2/LFCS has status indication lamp(s) which are lit in green(or blinking for a lamp indicating the communication status) when power is supplied to theunit or card, and the unit or card is operating normally. The figure below shows the locationsof the lamps on the AFS20D, for example. The meaning of each lamp status is summarizedin the table on the next page. Lamp names marked with (*3) in the table indicate the lampsthat are not found on AFS10S/AFG10S and AFS10D/AFG10D. Others are common to alleight models (AFS10S/AFG10S, AFS10D/AFG10D, AFS20S/AFG20S, and AFS20D/AFG20D).

A070204E.EPS

Power supply unitsRIO bus interface cardsProcessor cards

External interface unit

V net coupler units

RIO bus coupler units

Figure Units and Cards Having Status Indication Lamp : LFCS2/LFCS £

■ Status Indication Lamps : KFCS2/KFCS £Each unit and card in an KFCS2/KFCS has status indication lamp(s) which are lit in green(or blinking for a lamp indicating the communication status) when power is supplied to theunit or card, and the unit or card is operating normally. The figure above shows the loca-tions of the lamps. However, the ESB bus card is at the location of RIO bus card while theESB bus coupler is at the location of RIO bus coupler. The meaning of each lamp status issummarized in the table on the next page.

Lamp names marked with (*3) in the table indicate the lamps that are not found onAFS30S/AFG30S and AFS30D/AFG30D. Others are common to all cards and units.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 159: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-9

IM 33Q06C20-01E

SEE ALSO

For more information about lamp status on the units or cards, see the following:

“A6.2 Function of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS”

If a status indication lamp of a unit fails, contact Yokogawa’s sales agents and appropriate action.

Table Lamp Status : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Unit or Card Lamp Name On Off Remarks

Power supply unit RDY Normal Failed Indicates the unit status.

Processor card

HRDY Normal Failed Indicates the hardware status of the card.

RDY Normal Failed Indicates the card status.

CTRL In service Stand-by Lit for either processor card in a duplexed FCU.

COPY Program copy Normal Lit only while the program is being copied; normally off.

RIO bus interface card (*1)

HRDY Normal Failed Indicates the hardware status of the card.

RDY Normal Failed Indicates the card status.

CTRL During communication Stand-by Lit for either RIO bus interface card in a duplexed FCU.

V net coupler unit

RCV Receiving Not receiving Lit when communication is normal.

SND Normal (on) Failed Lit when communication is normal.

SND-L Normal (on) Stand-byNormal when either lamp is lit.

SND-R Normal (on) Stand-by

RIO bus coupler unit (*1)

RCV Receiving Not receiving Lit when communication is normal.

SND Normal (on) Failed Lit when communication is normal.

SND-L Normal (on) Stand-byNormal when either lamp is lit.

SND-R Normal (on) Stand-by

External interface unit

N1 Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal

N2 Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.

D1 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.

D2 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.

D3 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.

D4 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.

Failed Indicates the SB311 status.

Stand-by Lit for either SB311 in a duplexed FCU.

SOE out service

Lit when SOE is in service.

LINK not Established

The green light turns on when LINK is established.

InactiveThe green light turns on when frames are active on Ethernet.

Asynchro-nous

The green light turns on when external clock signal is used.

A070205E.EPS

ESB bus coupler unit (*2)

RCV Receiving Not receiving Lit when communication is normal.

SND-L Normal (on) Stand-byNormal when either lamp is lit.

SND-R Normal (on) Stand-by

ESB bus interface master module (with SOE interface )(*4)

RDY Normal

CTRL In service

SRDY SOE in service

LINK LINK established

ACT Active

SYNC Synchronous

ESB bus interface card (*2)

RDY Normal Failed Indicates the card status.

CTRL During communication Stand-by Lit for either ESB bus interface card in a duplexed FCU.

*1: In case of LFCS2/LFCS*2: In case of KFCS2/KFCS*3: Lamps of the fuses for door fans of the AFS20S/AFG20S, AFS20D/AFG20D, AFS40S/AFG40S and AFS40D/AFG40D.*4: For Models AFS30D, AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40D.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 160: 6C2001

A7-10<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

A7.2.4 Inspection by FFCS Status Display WindowWith FFCS status display window of HIS, the operating status of FFCS can bechecked.

■ FFCS Statsu Display Window : FFCS £The FFCS status display window can be displayed from the System Maintenance windowof a Human Interface Station (HIS). It is possible to check the operation status of a controlstation, the status of the I/O modules, and the status of the communication buses in thenetwork via the FFCS status display window.

It is recommended to check this window periodically, not only when troubles occur, toinspect the operation status of each station.

The figure below shows an example of a FFCS status display window.

FCS0101

Station No : 1

Type : AFF50D

Revision : R3.05. 00

Generation :

10/28/2004 13 : 29

CPU Idle Time : 34Sec

Comm Load Ave : 0%

Cur : 0%

Test Mode : OFF

Control Status : RUN

Comm I/O : ON

TEMP

Air in

Air out

Battery ( L, R )

Battery ( L, R )

A070206E.EPS

.SF FCS0101 FCS Status Display

READY

MAN

CPU

CPU

PSU

PSU

Not ReadyStand-ByControlHard ReadyMaintenance

MYPJT Domain : 01 V net1 V net2

FCS

IOMFCS

COM

02

1

COM

PSU PSU

01

PSU PSU

COM

03COM

PSU PSU

COM

04COM

PSU PSU

2

Figure FFCS Status Display Window : FFCS £

SEE ALSO

For more information about FFCS status display window, see the following:

E7.8, “FFCS Status Display Window” in Part E “Human Interface Station” of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E)

Page 161: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-11

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-01

A7.2.5 Inspection by FFCS Status Display LEDsThis section explains how to inspect each modules and common sections of FFCS.

■ Inspection of LEDs : FFCS £Power supply modules, processor modules, bus interface modules, and I/O modules havestatus display LEDs. It can easily be identified whether or not a module is operating nor-mally by checking whether these LEDs are turned on or off.

Table Types and Functions of Status Display LEDs of Common Modules : FFCS £

Modules name Indicator Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF

Power supply module

SYS +5V output normal +5V output abnormal

FLD +24V output normal

ER Bus interface master module

STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal

SND-1 Sending data Data is not sent

RCV-1 Receiving data Data is not received

A070207E.EPS

ACT

DX

Module is operating normally

Module is set to dual-redundant operation Module is set to single operation

The module is stand-by

+24V output abnormal

STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal

RCV Receiving data Data is not received

SND Sending data Data is not sent

ER Bus interface slave module

STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal

SEL During data transmission to I/O module Not sending

RSP During data reception from I/O module Not receiving

ESB businterface module

Processormodule

HRDY Hardware normal

RDY Module normal Module abnormal

CTRL Module is operating normally The module is stand-by

COPY Copying normal Not copying

SND-1, 2

RCV-1, 2

Sending frames to V net

Receiving frames from V net

Not sending

Not receiving

ESB Bus coupler module

RCV Receiving ESB bus frames from node units Not receiving

SND Sending ESB bus frames to V net Not sending

Hardware abnormal

Page 162: 6C2001

A7-12<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.3 Replacing PFCS/SFCS PartsThis section describes replacement of PFCS/SFCS parts.

IMPORTANT

• When replacing a unit or part, or when connecting and disconnecting cables, of an on-line dual-redundant PFCS/SFCS, perform replacement work at each side.

• When tightening the power supply and processor cards mounting screws, use a fine-tipped screwdriver. The standard screw tightening torque is 0.25N • m.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 163: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-13

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.3.1 Power Supply Unit Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of power supply unit.

■ Off-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS

● Removal : PFCS/SFCS

1. Check that the power switch of the power supply unit to be removed is turned off.

2. Disconnect the power cable connector from the nest power distribution board.

3. Loosen the four screws fastening the unit to the nest. The screws do not have to be removed.

4. Grasp the handle at the center of the unit and pull the unit forward.

● Installation : PFCS/SFCS

1. Slide the replacement or inspected power supply unit along the nest guide rails until itseats firmly into the backboard connector.

2. Install the unit to the nest using the screws at the front of the unit.

3. Connect the power supply unit cable connector to the nest power distribution boardand set the unit power switch to ON.

4. Check if the RDY lamp on the front of the power supply unit lights and if the status inthe FCS status display window is normal.

A070301E.EPSPower cable connector

Power supply unit

Backboard

Connector

Guide rail

Nest power distribution boardConnector

Mounting screws

Mounting screws

Handle

Switch

Figure Removing and Installing Power Supply Unit : PFCS/SFCS

SEE ALSO

The display contents of FCS status display window differs according to model. For details, see thefollowing:

E7, “Windows for System Administration” in Part E “Human Interface Station” of Reference (IM33S01B30-01E)

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 164: 6C2001

A7-14<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ On-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS

● Single FCS : PFCS/SFCS

The power supply unit cannot be replaced on-line.

● Dual-redundant FCS : PFCS/SFCS

WARNING

When removing a power supply unit of an on-line dual-redundant FCS, disconnect thepower supply unit cable connector from the power distribution board so that the operatingside power supply unit and other units are not adversely affected and to avoid the danger ofelectric shock.

The power supply unit can be replaced without turning off the PFCS/SFCS power onlywhen the FCS has a dual-redundant construction.

• Removal

1. Set the power supply unit power switch to OFF, and disconnect the power supply cableconnector.

2. Check if the power supply unit status lamp (RDY) is off.

3. Loosen the power supply unit mounting screws.

4. Grip the handle at the front of the power supply unit and remove the unit by pulling itforward.

• Installation

1. Slide the power supply unit along the nest guide rails until the connector on the rear ofthe unit is seated firmly in the backboard connector.

2. Tighten the power supply unit mounting screws.Connect the power supply unit power cable to the connector and set the unit powerswitch to ON.

3. Check that the RDY lamp in front of the power supply unit lights and the FCS is normalon the FCS status display window.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 165: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-15

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.3.2 Processor Card Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of processor card.

■ Off-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS

WARNING

When the processor card is removed, the saved contents are erased. Before removing theunit, save the tuning parameters.

● Removal: PFCS/SFCS

1. Loosen the screws fastening the unit to the nest. The screws do not have to be re-moved.

2. Grip the handles at the top and bottom of the processor card and pull the unit forward.

● Installation: PFCS/SFCS

1. Check if the domain number and station number of the new processor card match thesettings of the removed processor card.

2. Slide the inspected processor card along the nest guide rails until it seats firmly intothe backboard connector.

3. Fasten the processor card to the nest using the screws at the front of the unit.

4. Turn on the power and check if the processor card is in the normal state by checking ifthe lamp on the front of the processor card is lit.

SEE ALSO

For a detailed description of lighting of the processor card front panel lamp, see the following:

A6.1.4, “Processor Card of PFCS/SFCS”

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 166: 6C2001

A7-16<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A070302E.EPS

Processor unit

Backboard

Connectors

Guide rails

Mounting screw

Handle

CTRL lamp

START/STOPswitch

Figure Removing and Installing Processor Card : PFCS/SFCS

■ On-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS

● Single FCS : PFCS/SFCS

The processor card cannot be replaced on-line.

● Dual-redundant FCS : PFCS/SFCS

The processor card can be replaced without turning off the PFCS/SFCS power only whenthe PFCS/SFCS has a dual-redundant construction.

• Removal

1. Check if the CTRL lamp in the processor card to be removed is OFF (in the standbystate). If the CTRL lamp is ON, press the START/STOP switch to turn off the lamp (toplace it in the standby state).

2. Loosen the processor card mounting screws.

3. Grip the handle at the front of the processor card and remove the unit by pulling it forward.

• Installation

1. Check if the domain number and station number of the new processor card match thesettings of the removed unit.

2. Slide the processor card along the nest guide rails until the connectors on the rear ofthe unit seat firmly into the backboard connectors.

3. Tighten the processor card mounting screws.Push the START/STOP switch to restart.

4. After the power comes on, check if the processor card is in the normal state using thelamp on the unit and the FCS status display window.The processor card automatically starts copying the program.When copying is complete, the processor card enters the READY state.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 167: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-17

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.3.3 Control Bus Coupler Unit Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of control bus coupler unit.

Replace the control bus coupler unit as described below.

■ Off-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCSThe control bus coupler unit is replaced when power is turned off.

When communication bus cables are redundant and another station connected to each busis operating, do not remove both bus cables from the connector assembly at the same time.

■ On-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS

● Single Communication Bus : PFCS/SFCS

The control bus coupler unit cannot be replaced on-line.

● Dual-redundant Communication Bus : PFCS/SFCS

• Removal

1. Check if the coupler that is not to be replaced is in the normal state, and its ENBL/DSBL switch is in the ENBL position.

2. Set the ENBL/DSBL switch of the coupler to be replaced to the DSBL position.

3. Disconnect the connector assembly, with bus cable attached.

4. Loosen the two screws fastening the control bus coupler unit to the nest.

5. Grip the handles at the front top and bottom of the control bus coupler unit and removethe unit by pulling it forward.

SEE ALSO

For a detailed description of the bus cable connection and disconnection procedure, see the following:

A4.3.1, “Connecting the PFCS/SFCS Bus Cable”

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 168: 6C2001

A7-18<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

• Installation

1. Set the ENBL/DSBL switch of the new coupler unit to the DSBL position.

2. Install the connector assembly, with bus cable attached, to the control bus couplerunit.

3. Slide the control bus coupler unit along the nest guide rails until the connector on therear of the unit seats firmly into the backboard connector.

4. Set the ENBL/DSBL switch of the installed coupler unit to the ENBL position.

5. Check if the control bus coupler unit is in the normal state using the lamp on the frontof the panel and the FCS status display window.

A070303E.EPS

Control bus coupler unitthat is not replaced

Backboard

ConnectorGuide rail

ConnectorControl bus coupler unit

to be replaced

Mounting screw

Handle

Connectorassembly

Control bus bus cable

ENBL/DSBLswitch

ENBL/DSBLswitch

Figure Installing and Removing Control Bus Coupler Unit and Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 169: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-19

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.3.4 Battery Unit Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of battery unit and battery pack placed in thebattery backup unit.

■ Battery Life Label : PFCS/SFCSThe battery unit installed at the BACKUP-L side and the battery unit installed at theBACKUP-R side have a 1-to-1 correspondence with the processor card at the left side andthe processor card at the right side, respectively.

The battery unit contains the processor card main memory backup battery pack. A batterylife label is stuck to the front of the battery unit.

The life the battery pack varies with average ambient temperature. Replace the batterypack according to Table in the section A7.3.5, “PFCS/SFCS Periodic Replacement Parts.”

WARNING

When the memory contents must be preserved, always replace the battery pack with thePFCS/SFCS power turned on. If the FCS power is turned off, the contents of the processorcard main memory corresponding to the battery unit will be lost.

The figure below shows the battery unit with the battery pack installed.

A070304E.EPS

Date of a battery life

Battery packBattery unit

Figure Battery Unit and Battery Pack : PFCS/SFCS

SEE ALSO

For the recommended replacement interval, see the following:

A7.3.5, “Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having Defined Life Spans)”

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 170: 6C2001

A7-20<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing Battery Unit : PFCS/SFCS

CAUTION

• When handling battery pack, wear wrist strap for static prevention.

• When changing batteries while the power supply is not shutdown, do not put handsinside of the device since it is danger of electric shock.

• The used batteries need to be handled carefully. You can also handover the usedbatteries to the Yokogawa's sales agents.

Mounting and changing batteries must follow the procedure in this document.

● Removal : PFCS/SFCS

1. Set the CPU BACKUP ON/OFF switch of the battery backup unit to OFF.The CPU BACKUP ON/OFF switch is the lock type. Switch it while pulling the knobforward.

2. Loosen the battery unit mounting screws, and pull the battery unit toward you byholding the handle.When the unit is pulled out about 10 mm, the connector inside the battery backup unitis disconnected from the battery pack connector.

3. Separate the battery backup unit from the battery unit by pulling the battery unitforward. (Depth: Approximately 70 mm)

4. Remove the battery clamp bracket at the top of the battery unit. (Two M3 screws)

5. Squeeze the tabs at the left and right sides of the connector to the inside and removethem from the square holes. The tabs can be easily removed by lightly squeezingthem to the inside with pliers and pushing them forward. (See the figure below)

A070305E.EPS

Inside connector

Handle

Battery unit

Battery packclamp bracket

Battery pack connector

Battery backup unit

CPU BACKUPON/OFF switch

Battery unit mounting screw

Tab

Tab

M3 screws

Figure Battery Unit and Connectors : PFCS/SFCS

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 171: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-21

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Installation : PFCS/SFCS

1. Stick a new Battery Life label to the new battery pack, and then install the battery packinto the battery unit while keeping the correct direction of the battery pack connector.

2. When installing the battery pack into the battery unit, set the connector to the corner ofthe bracket while keeping the larger side of the connector cover upward, the black linerightward and the red line leftward (as illustrated below).

3. After installing the new battery pack to the battery unit, set the CPU BACKUP ON/OFFswitch to the ON position.

A070306E.EPS

Red line at the left

Black line at the right

Large part at the top Square hole M3 mounting screws

Battery clamp bracket

Connector

Battery pack

Stick new batterylife label

Figure Installing battery pack : PFCS/SFCS

IMPORTANT

• Replace the battery pack before the end of its life.

• Order a replacement battery pack at least one month before the end of the old batterypack’s life.

• Do not short circuit the battery terminals.

• Do not throw a used battery pack into a fire or heat it. It will cause electrolyte leakage,heating, and breaking.

• Do not disassemble and modify the battery pack.

• Do not use a battery pack other than this product.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 172: 6C2001

A7-22<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.3.5 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts HavingDefined Life Spans)Model PFCS/SFCS has components with a useful life that need to be replaced peri-odically. The parts having defined life spans, which can be replaced by the user areavailable as spare parts and consumables. Purchase and replace as necessary.

Read this section thoroughly and carry out the periodical replacement.

IMPORTANT

Precautions for parts having defined life spans

• The term “Parts having defined life spans” refers to parts that are expected to wear outor break down within 10 years from initial use under normal conditions of use and stor-age. Therefore, parts with expected life spans of 10 years or more are excluded here.

• The recommended replacement cycle is the cycle indicated for preventive mainte-nance. It provides no guarantee against the accidental failures.

• The recommended replacement cycle is merely a guideline. The actual replacementcycle depends on the usage conditions.

• The recommended replacement cycle is subject to change according to actual fieldresults.

■ Parts Having Defined Life Spans : PFCS/SFCSThe table below shows the recommended part replacement cycles for preventive maintenance.Parts indicated by a “Yes” in the “Replacement by user” column of the table can be replaced bythe user. Parts indicated by a “No” in the “Replacement by user” column cannot be re-placed by the user, so please contact the Yokogawa’s sales agents for replacement.

Table Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans : PFCS/SFCS

Part name Part number

Recommended replacement cycle

Replacementby user Remarks

Battery pack S9765UK

3 years Yes At the ambient temperature 30 deg. C or less (*1)

Power supply unit(24 V DC) PW704

(PW701)

8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

Power supply unit(220 - 240 V AC) PW702 8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

Power supply unit(100 - 120 V AC) PW701 8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

1.5 years Yes At the ambient temperature 40 deg. C or less (*1)

9 months Yes At the ambient temperature 50 deg. C or less (*1)

8 years No 100 - 120 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

(PW702) 8 years No 220 - 240 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

(PW704) 8 years No 24 V DC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (in a power supply unit)

Power supplyinternal fuse

S9578VK 3 years No (for PW701, 6.3A)

S9578VK 3 years No (for PW702, 6.3A)

S9504VK 3 years No (for PW704, 15A)

A070307E.EPS

*1: The ambient temperature varies with FCS installation conditions. When FCS is installed in the cabinet, theambient temperature means the temperature inside the cabinet, not outside the cabinet.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-01

Page 173: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-23

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.4 Replacing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS PartsThis section describes the procedures for replacing cards and units in a non-redun-dant LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and redundant LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 174: 6C2001

A7-24<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.4.1 Common Procedure for Replacing Cards and UnitsThis section describes the common procedure for removing and installing a unit orcard.

■ Removing a Unit or Card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £To remove a unit or card from nest:

1. Loosen the screws that attach the unit or card (two or four, black, M2.5 screws). Thescrews need not be removed.

2. Grip the handles at the top and bottom on card or unit, or the handle at the top, andpull to remove the card or unit.

■ Installing a Unit or Card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

IMPORTANT

Use a fine-tipped screwdriver when installing a card or unit in a nest. The standard tighten-ing torque is 0.25 N • m.

1. Insert the card or unit which has been inspected or a new one to the bottom along withthe guide rail of the nest until it is firmly inserted into the connector on the back board.

2. Tighten the attaching screws (M2.5, black) at the front to fix the card or unit to the nest.

3. Make sure that the indication lamps of each card and unit indicate normal state.

SEE ALSO

After installing a card or unit, check the indication lamp(s) and confirm that the card or unit is normal inreference to the following:

A7.2.3, “Check of Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS”

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 175: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-25

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.4.2 Replacing Cards or Units in Non-Redundant LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSWhen replacing a card or unit in a non-redundant LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, followthe precautions and procedures described below.

■ Replacing the Power Supply Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

CAUTION

Disconnect the connector at the nest power distribution board before removing the powersupply unit.

● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

WARNING

• Removing the power supply unit clears the memory contents of the processor card.Save the memory contents before removing the power supply unit if necessary.

• To remove:

1. Disconnect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to be removed fromthe nest power distribution board.

2. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the power supply unit.

3. To avoid draining the battery, turn OFF the battery switch of the removed unit.

• To install:

1. Install the unit according to Section A7.4.1.

2. Connect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to the nest power distri-bution board.

3. Turn ON the battery switch.

SEE ALSO

For more information about installing and removing the power supply unit, see the following:

A7.4.1" Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"

● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

The power supply unit cannot be removed during operation.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 176: 6C2001

A7-26<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing the Processor Card and RIO/ESB Bus Interface Card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

WARNING

Removing the processor card will clears the memory contents of the processor card. Savethe memory contents before removing the processor card.

• To remove:

1. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard from nest.

• To install:

1. Confirm that the domain and station number settings on the processor card to beinstalled, are the same as those of the removed card.

2. Follow Section A7.4.1 to install the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard to nest.

3. Then check the status lamps on the card to confirm that the card operates normally.

SEE ALSO

For more information about installing and removing the processor cards, RIO/ESB bus interfaces cards,see the following:

A7.4.1 "Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"

● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Neither the processor card nor an RIO bus/ESB bus interface card can be removed duringoperation.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 177: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-27

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.4.3 Replacing Cards or Units in Duplexed LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSFor a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, cards and units can be replaced duringoperation; however, follow the precautions and procedures described below.

■ Replacing a Power Supply Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

WARNING

• Removing a power supply unit clears the memory contents of the processor card onthe same side. Save the memory contents before removing a power supply unit. If thesame memory contents are saved in the paired processor card, however, saving is notnecessary since the memory contents will be copied automatically when the power isturned on again.

• To remove:

1. Disconnect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to be removed fromthe nest power distribution board.

2. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the power supply unit.

3. To avoid draining the battery, turn OFF the battery switch of the removed unit.

• To install:

1. Install the unit according to Section A7.4.1.

2. Connect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to the nest power distri-bution board.

3. Turn ON the battery switch when power is supplied to the power supply unit.

SEE ALSO

For more information about installing and removing the power supply unit, see the following:

A7.4.1 "Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 178: 6C2001

A7-28<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

CAUTION

• Before removing a power supply unit from a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSduring operation, disconnect the cable connector of the power supply unit from thenest power distribution board in order to prevent influencing the other power supplyunit in service and other cards and units, and to prevent electric shock.

• To remove:

1. Check the status lamps of the power supply unit, processor card, and RIO bus/ESBbus interface card on the side other than the power supply unit to be removed, andconfirm that they are normal.

2. Go to step 3 when removing the power supply unit on the side where the processorcard is in the stand-by mode.To remove the power supply unit on the side where the processor card is in service,press the START/STOP switch on the processor card in service to change the modesof the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card in service to stand-by.At this time, confirm that the modes of the processor card and RIO bus/ESB businterface card on the other side are changed to in service.

3. Disconnect the cable connector of the power supply unit to be removed, from the nestpower distribution board.

4. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the power supply unit.

5. To avoid draining the battery, turn OFF the battery switch of the removed unit.

• To install:

1. Install the power supply unit according to Section A7.4.1.

2. Connect the cable connector of the power supply unit to the nest power distributionboard.

3. Turn ON the battery switch of the power supply unit.

SEE ALSO

For more information about installing and removing the power supply unit, see the following:

A7.4.1 "Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 179: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-29

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing a Processor Card and RIO Bus/ESB Bus Interface Card :LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

WARNING

Removing a processor card clears the memory contents of the processor card. Save thememory contents before removing a processor card. If the same memory contents aresaved in the paired processor card, however, saving is not needed since the memorycontents are copied automatically when the power is turned on again.

• To remove:

1. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard.

• To install:

1. Confirm that the domain and station number settings on the processor card to beinstalled, are the same as those of the removed card.

2. Install the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card, and then check thestatus lamps on the card to confirm that the card operates normally. For a processorcard, the COPY lamp lights to indicate that the program is being copied.

● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• To remove:

1. Check the status lamps of the power supply unit, processor card, and RIO bus/ESBbus interface card on the side other than the processor card or RIO bus/ESB businterface card to be removed, and confirm that they are normal.

2. Go to step 3 when removing the processor card or RIO bus/ESB bus interface card inthe stand-by mode.To remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card in service, pressthe START/STOP switch on the processor card in service to change the modes of theprocessor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card in service to stand-by.At this time, confirm that the modes of the processor card and RIO bus/ESB businterface card on the other side are changed to in service.

3. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard.

• To install:

1. Confirm that the domain and station number settings on the processor card to beinstalled, are the same as those of the removed card.

2. Install the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card.

3. Then check the status lamps on the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard operates normally. For a processor card, the COPY lamp lights to indicate thatthe program is being copied.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 180: 6C2001

A7-30<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.4.4 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts HavingDefined Life Spans)Model LFCS2/LFC2, KFCS2/KFCS has components with a useful life that need to bereplaced periodically. The parts having defined life spans, which can be replaced bythe user are available as spare parts and consumables. Purchase and replace asnecessary.

Read this section thoroughly and carry out the periodical replacement.

IMPORTANT

Precautions for parts having defined life spans

• The term “Parts having defined life spans” refers to parts that are expected to wear outor break down within 10 years from initial use under normal conditions of use andstorage. Therefore, parts with expected life spans of 10 years or more are excludedhere.

• The recommended replacement cycle is the cycle indicated for preventive mainte-nance. It provides no guarantee against the accidental failures.

• The recommended replacement cycle is merely a guideline. The actual replacementcycle depends on the usage conditions.

• The recommended replacement cycle is subject to change according to actual fieldresults.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 181: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-31

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Parts Having Defined Life Spans : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £The table below shows the recommended part replacement cycles for preventive mainte-nance. Parts indicated by a “Yes” in the “Replacement by user” column of the table can bereplaced by the user. Parts indicated by a “No” in the “Replacement by user” columncannot be replaced by the user, so please contact the Yokogawa’s sales agents for re-placement.

Table Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Part NamePart

numberRecommended

replacement cycleReplacement

by user Remarks

Air filter

Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (in a power supply unit)

T9070CB 1 year Yes For door fan unit (Cabinet type)

(PW301) 8 years No

100 - 120 V AC. For AF�10/AF�30 : At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)For AF�20/AF�40 : At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)

(PW302) 8 years No

220 - 240 V AC. For AF�10/AF�30 : At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)For AF�20/AF�40 : At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)

(PW304) 8 years No

24 V DC.For AF�10/AF�30 : At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)For AF�20/AF�40 : At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)

Fan unit Model AIP601 4 years Yes For nest and door fan units

Battery pack S9400UK

Fuse built in power supply unit

S9502VKS9580VKS9504VK

S9109VK

A1546EF

3 years

3 years Yes

For PW301For PW302For PW304

For PW484

For PW481, PW482

At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)

1.5 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

9 months Yes At the ambient temperature of 50 deg. C or lower (*1)

A070401E.EPS

T9070CK 1 year Yes For FCU nest (Rack mountable type)

8 years

No

No

8 years No

*1: The ambient temperature varies with FCS installation conditions. When FCS is installed in the cabinet, the ambienttemperature means the temperature inside the cabinet, not outside the cabinet.

How to replace the air filters, fan units, fuses, battery packs and relays will be explained inthe following sections.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 182: 6C2001

A7-32<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing an Air Filter : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

CAUTION

Periodically clean air filters at about three-month intervals. Use water or neutral detergentand re-fit the filters after they have dried.

● Replacing the Air Filter of Rack Mountable : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS£

The air filter is housed in a bracket and held by two nylon latches beneath the nest fans asshown below, and can be replaced during operation.

Complete the replacement as quickly as possible.

A070402E.EPS

Filter

Bracket

Nylon latches

Figure Replacing an Air Filter : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• To replace:

1. Pull the nylon latches to unlock them and draw off the bracket.

2. Remove the air filter from the bracket. If the bracket is dirty, use a dry cloth or vacuumcleaner to remove stains and dust.

3. Put a clean air filter in the bracket and insert the bracket to the bottom. It is recom-mended to use the air filter that was installed when delivered and the one that cameas an accessory, in turns.

4. Push to lock the nylon latches.

5. Clean the dirty air filter using neutral detergent and store it after it has dried.

This completes the replacement.

As a guideline, clean air filters every three months.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 183: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-33

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Replacing the Air Filters with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

There are two fans on each of the front and rear door of the cabinet to cool the inside of thecabinet.

An air filter is installed at the air intake of each door as shown below.

A070403E.EPS

Handle

Air filter

Door fans

Bracket

Figure Air Filter for Door Fans : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• To replace:

1. Open the front or rear door.

2. The air filter can be found inside of the door between the door plate and the door fans.Grip the bracket handle with the thumb and index finger and pull the handle up. Then,take off the air filter from the bracket. If the bracket is dirty, use a dry cloth or vacuumcleaner to remove stains and dust.

3. Put a clean air filter in the bracket and push the bracket back to the bottom. It isrecommended to use the air filter that was installed when delivered and the one thatcame as an accessory, in turns.

4. Clean the dirty air filter using neutral detergent and store it after it has dried.

This completes the replacement.

As a guideline, clean air filters every three months.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 184: 6C2001

A7-34<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing a Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

WARNING

When online replacing the fan unit (AIP601) while the FCS is running, check if the seal withcharacter “1” enclosed in a rectangular is stuck at the fan unit.

If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit, replacing the fan unit should not be performed online.If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit and replacing the fan unit is performed online, theFCS may unexpectedly stop.

A070414E.EPS

1

seal1

Figure Seal Stuck on Fan Unit (AIP601)

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 185: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-35

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Replacing a Nest Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

The two nest fan units are beneath the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet as shownin the figure below.

WARNING

When a fan fails, or when the speed of a fan becomes abnormal, the corresponding “FANALARM” lamp on the external interface unit lights in red. (On the left is the N1 fan, and onthe right is N2.) A fan unit can be replaced while the FCU is operating. However, do notreplace both fan units at the same time; replace them one by one.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit from strikes.

Air direction

Fan unitA070404E.EPS

1

Handle

Movable plate

Guide pin

Guide External interface unit

Figure Replacing a Nest Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• To replace:

The fan unit should be replaced according to the procedure below.

1. Replace the entire set of a nest fan unit at one time: fans, 12 V DC power supplyconnector, and fan attaching bracket.

2. Grip the handle with the thumb and index finger and move the movable plate to unlockthe unit.

3. Then, pull to draw out the fan unit.

4. Fit the guide of the new fan unit to the nest rail of the nest and insert the fan unit to thebottom until it engages with the connector of the nest.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit fromstrikes.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 186: 6C2001

A7-36<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Replacing a Door Fan Unit (with Cabinet) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Two door fan units are installed on each of the front and rear doors of the cabinet as shownin the figure below.

WARNING

When a fan fails, or when the speed of a fan becomes abnormal, the corresponding “FANALARM” lamp on the main power distribution board lights in red. A fan unit can be replacedwhile the node is operating. However, do not replace both fan units on the door at thesame time; replace them one by one.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit from strikes.

A070405E.EPS

Door fan unitsuctioning the air from outside the cabinetHKU

Figure Replacing a Door Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• To replace:

The fan unit should be replaced according to the procedure below.

1. Replace the entire set of a nest fan unit at one time: fans, 12 V DC power supplyconnector, and fan attaching bracket.

2. Grip the handle with the thumb and index finger and move the movable plate to unlockthe unit.

3. Then, pull to draw out the fan unit.

4. Fit the guide of the new fan unit to the nest rail and insert the fan unit to the bottomuntil it is engaged with the connector.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit fromstrikes.

When the speed of a fan becomes abnormal, the corresponding FAN ALARM lamp (LED)on the external interface unit lights in red. The LED labels correspond to fan units individu-ally as follows: D1 for the left fan on the front door, D2 for the right fan on the front door, D3for the left fan on the rear door, and D4 for the right fan on the rear door.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 187: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-37

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing Fuses : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Although fuses are not mandatory-replacement parts, the following describes the replace-ment procedure.

WARNING

When online replacing the fuses of the fan unit while the FCS is running, check if the sealwith character “1” enclosed in a rectangular is stuck at the fan unit.

If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit, replacing the fuses of the fan unit should not beperformed online. If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit and replacing the fuses of the fanunit is performed online, the FCS may unexpectedly stop.

A070414E.EPS

1

seal1

Figure Seal Stuck on Fan Unit (AIP601)

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 188: 6C2001

A7-38<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Replacing a Fan Fuse : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

A fuse for each fan is mounted on the external interface unit.

The figure below shows fuses on the external interface units of an LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet and rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.

FUSE

RL1RDYRLYRL2 N1 N2 D1 D2 D3 D4

FAN ALARM

FCU FRONTDOOR

REARDOOR

CN3

(Part No. S9528VK: 1.6 A fuse)A070409E.EPS

Figure Fuses on External Interface Unit of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

FAN ALARM

FUSE

RL1 RL2

READY

TM1

N1 N2

A070410E.EPS

(Part No. S9528VK: 1.6 A fuse)

Figure Fuses on External Interface Unit of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

• To replace:

The fuse can be hot-replaced while the FCS is running. Before replacing the fuse while theFCS is running, check if a seal with 1 enloased in a rectangular is stuck at the fan unit.

1. Pull out the fuse. It may be too tight to pull out by hand; it is easier to use a pair oflong-nose pliers to clip the fuse and pull it out.

2. Confirm that the new fuse has the same rating and install it. Make sure that the letterson the fuse case are not upside down.

3. Confirm that the corresponding fan runs normally.

● Replacing a Relay Fuse : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

Relays for the CPU ready signal from the processor card and speed control of fans aremounted on the external interface unit.

The procedure for replacing these fuses is the same as that for a fan fuse described above.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 189: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-39

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing the Battery Pack : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £A battery pack is built into the power supply unit in order to back up the main memory of theprocessor card in case of a power failure.

CAUTION

• Use only a battery specified by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.

• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.

• When replacing the battery unit while the power is on, do not touch the internal circuitsof the power supply unit since there are high-voltage circuits.

• If the memory contents must not be cleared when replacing the battery unit, makesure you leave the power to the FCU turned on. Turning OFF the battery switch whenthe power is off results in the loss of all the memory contents in the processor card.

The label on the faceplate of a battery unit shows the validity period, which is based on thecondition where the ambient temperature is 30 deg C or less on average.

Replace the battery with a new one when the validity period expires.

The figure below shows how a battery unit is installed.

BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)

07.10,

Battery unit attaching screw

Battery ON/OFF switch

Data of battery life

Battery Life Label

Connector

A070411E.EPS

Battery pack

Bracket

Bracket attachingscrews

Figure Power Supply Unit and Battery Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 190: 6C2001

A7-40<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A070412E.EPS

Connector

Battery pack

Unused pin

ConnectorClaw

When plugging in the connector, make sure that the red wire is lower and the black is upper.

Battery pack

Orientation of connector

Black wire

Red wire

Top

Claw

Figure Battery Pack and Connector : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● To replace : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

The battery pack should be replaced according to the procedure below.

1. Confirm that the power to the FCU is on.

2. Turn OFF the BATTERY toggle switch, which is a locking switch and needs to beunlocked by pulling the lever first.

3. Loosen the battery unit attaching screw and pull the handle towards you.When the battery is pulled out by about 10 mm, it is disconnected from the connectorinside the power supply unit.

4. Continuously pull the battery unit to remove it from the power supply unit. (The batteryunit is 150 mm depth.)

5. Detach the bracket for fastening the battery unit at the rear of the battery unit byunscrewing the two M3 screws.

6. Push the top and bottom claws of the connector to the inside and pull out the connec-tor from the socket. The connector can be easily pulled out by using a pair of long-nose pliers to claw the connector softly and push it slightly.

7. Install a new battery in the reverse order. For the orientation of the connector, see thefigure.

8. After installing a new battery unit in the power supply unit, turn ON the BATTERYtoggle switch.

This completes replacement of the battery unit.

IMPORTANT

• Replace a battery pack when the validity period expires.

• Order a new battery at least one month before the validity period expires.

• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.

• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.

• Do not throw a battery pack in a fire.

• Do not disassemble a battery pack.

• A battery pack contains nickel-cadmium batteries, and hence it must be discardedvery carefully to prevent environmental pollution.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 191: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-41

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Replacing a Relay (with Cabinet) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

CAUTION

Do not detach the relay when the READY contact is used and a voltage is applied to theREADY terminals; an electric shock may result.

If the relay absolutely must be detached while the READY contact is excited, contactYokogawa’s sales agents.

A plug-in relay is installed at the contact output unit on the main power distribution unit of anFCU with cabinet.

Locked Unlocked

Contact Output Unit(Part number of relay: S9725VM)

A070413E.EPS

StopperLever

Relay

SocketClutch

Figure Replacing a Relay : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

● To replace : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £

The relay should be replaced according to the procedure below.

1. When the relay is correctly installed, the clutch on the lever attached to the socket islocking the stopper of the relay cover to prevent the relay from coming off. (See theleft figure above.)

2. Turn the lever to the right gently.The tip of the level will move apart from the relay case by nearly 5 mm, and the rightside bottom of the relay will be lifted up by the lever action.

3. Pull out the relay cover from the socket by hand.

4. To install a new relay, plug it into the socket perpendicular to the socket when the leveris in the unlocking position (turned right) until the clutch on the level makes a clicksound and the relay is locked.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 192: 6C2001

A7-42<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.5 Replacing FFCS PartsThis section describes the procedures for replacing modules and units in a FFCS.

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 193: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-43

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A7.5.1 Replacing Common ModulesThis section explains how to remove/install power supply modules, processormodules and bus interface modules. Dual-redundant power supply modules, proces-sor modules and bus interface modules can be removed or installed without turningoff the power supply of a field control unit.

IMPORTANT

If ESB buses or ER buses are in dual-redundant configuration, the power supply modulesand bus interface modules are provided for both segments. When replacing the modules,remove the modules of one segment and install a new on first. Only when the segment iscorrectly running, then to remove and install the modules of the other segment.

■ Exchange Bus Cables : FFCS £Check the hardware status on FFCS status display window.

● Procedure of Exchanging ESB Bus Cables : FFCS £

1. When exchanging a bus cable, the corresponding bus becomes abnormal. It is neces-sary to confirm that the communication to all the nodes and I/O modules by the otherbus is properly performed.

2. Disconnect the ESB bus cable from the ESB bus coupler module.

3. Exchange the ESB bus cables.

4. Connect the ESB bus cable to the ESB bus coupler module.

5. Confirm that all the related parts are running properly.

● Procedure of Exchanging ER Bus Cables : FFCS £

1. Check on FFCS status display window or the LED on EB401 module to confirm thatthe ER bus to be exchanged is on the standby side. (When EB401 is standby, ACT isunlit.)

If the EB401 is in control, it is necessary to switch the control right to the other EB401.

2. Exchange the ER bus cable.

3. Then confirm that all the nodes on the bus are running properly.

Page 194: 6C2001

A7-44<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Relpacing Power Supply Module : FFCS £Power supply modules can be replaced according to the procedure described below.

IMPORTANT

Make sure to check that the status display LED of the power supply module to be removedis turned off before removing the power supply module.

Remove the connector of the power supply cables from the external interface unit and turnoff the power supply before removing the power supply module.

● Procedure for Removing Power Supply Modules : FFCS £

1. Shut off the power supply of the power supply module to be removed.In the case of dual-redundant modules, shut off the power supply of the power supplymodule on the side to be removed.

2. Remove the fixing screws of the power supply module. There is one at the upper partand two at the bottom part.

3. Pull the power supply module forward and remove it from the base unit.

● Procedure for Installing Power Supply Modules : FFCS £

IMPORTANT

Use a plus or minus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the power supply module. As aguideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.

Install the power supply module following the steps of the “Procedure for Removing PowerSupply Modules” in the reverse order.

1. Install the power supply module on the base unit.

2. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and two places at the bottom part of thepower supply module.

3. Insert the corresponding connector of the power supply cable to the external interfaceunit and supply power.

Page 195: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-45

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A070501E.EPS

Base unit

Power supply module

Figure Installing Power Supply Module : FFCS £

Page 196: 6C2001

A7-46<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Replacing Processor Module : FFCS £How to replace the processor module is explained in this chapter.

WARNING

When remove the processor module, the contents stored in the memory will be erased. It isnecessary to run saving parameters before pulling out the processor module.

SEE ALSO

For more information about front lamps of processor module, see the following:

A6.3.3, “Processor Module”

● Remove Processor Module : FFCS £

1. Confirm that the CTRL lamp on the processor module to be removed is off (indicatesthat the module is in standby state).

2. Disconnect the V net coupler cable at the front side of the processor module. Andpromptly remove the two V net coupler cables at both positions.

3. Loosen the screws that fix the processor module.

4. Pull out the processor module straightly.

● Install Processor Module : FFCS £

1. Check the processor module to be installed to confirm that the domain number andthe station number are the same as the replaced module.

2. Install the processor module into the base unit. Make sure that the processor moduleis firmly inserted into the slot at the backboard.

3. Fasten the screws that fix the processor module.

4. Connect the V net coupler cable at the front side of the processor module. Andpromptly put back the two V net coupler cables at both positions.

5. Check the front lamps or the FFCS status display window to make sure that theprocessor module is at normal state.

Then program copy will start automatically. When copy is completed, the module willbe in standby state.

Page 197: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-47

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A070502E.EPS

Base unit

Processor module

Figure Installing Processor Module : FFCS £

Page 198: 6C2001

A7-48<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Replacing ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS £ESB bus coupler module for both single and dual-redundant operation are replacedaccording to the procedure described below.

● Procedure for Removing ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS £

1. Remove the fixing screws of the ESB bus coupler module. There is one at the upperpart and one at the bottom part.

2. Pull the ESB bus coupler module forward and remove it from the base unit.

3. Remove the upper and lower part screws of the cable connector thus to remove theESB bus coupler module.

● Procedure for Installing ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS £

IMPORTANT

Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ESB bus coupler module. As a guide-line, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.

Install the ESB bus coupler module following the steps of the “Procedure for RemovingESB Bus Coupler Module” in the reverse order.

1. Install the cable connector on the installed ESB bus coupler module.

2. Use the two screws at the upper and lower part of the connector to fasten the cableconnector. The torque to fasten the screws on ESB bus connector is about 0.3 N•m.

3. Install the ESB bus coupler module from the base unit.

4. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ESBbus coupler module.

Page 199: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-49

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Replacing ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS £ESB bus interface module for both single and dual-redundant operation are replacedaccording to the procedure described below.

● Procedure for Removing ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS £

1. Remove the fixing screws of the ESB bus interface module. There is one at the upperpart and one at the bottom part.

2. Pull the ESB bus interface module forward and remove it from the base unit.

3. Remove the upper and lower part screws of the branch connector thus to remove theESB bus interface module.

4. Remove the ESB bus branch connector. But do not disconnect the ESB bus cableconnected to the branch connector.

● Procedure for Installing ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS £

IMPORTANT

Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ESB bus interface module. As a guide-line, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.

Install the ESB bus interface module following the steps of the “Procedure for RemovingESB Bus Interface Module” in the reverse order.

1. Set the ESB address of the ESB bus interface module to be installed to the sameaddress as the removed ESB bus interface module.

2. Install the branch connector on the installed ESB bus interface module.

3. Fix the upper and lower part screws on the installed ESB bus branch connector.

4. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ESB bus interface module with your fingers andinstall it on the base unit.

5. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ESBbus interface module.

Page 200: 6C2001

A7-50<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Replacing ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS £ER bus Interface Master Module for both single and dual-redundant operation arereplaced according to the procedure described below.

● Procedure for Removing ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS £

1. Remove the communication cable of the ER bus Interface Master Module to beremoved.

Remove the insulation sheet and disconnect the T-type connector from the BNCconnector of the ER bus Interface Master Module. At this point, do not remove thecables and terminal resistor connected to the T-type connector.

2. Remove the fixing screws of the ER bus Interface Master Module. There is one at theupper part and one at the bottom part.

3. Pull the ER bus Interface Master Module forward and remove it from the base unit.

● Procedure for Installing ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS £

IMPORTANT

Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ER bus Interface Master Module. As aguideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.

Install the ER bus Interface Master Module following the steps of the “Procedure for Re-moving ER Bus Interface Master Module” in the reverse order.

1. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ER bus Interface Master Module with yourfingers and install it on the base unit.

2. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ERbus Interface Master Module.

3. Install the communication cable on the installed ER bus Interface Master Module.

4. Installed the insulation sheet.

Page 201: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-51

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Replacing ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS £ER bus Interface Slave Module for both single and dual-redundant operation arereplaced according to the procedure described below.

● Procedure for Removing ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS £

1. Remove the communication cable of the ER bus Interface Slave Module to be re-moved.

Remove the insulation sheet and disconnect the T-type connector from the BNCconnector of the ER bus Interface Slave Module. At this point, do not remove thecables and terminal resistor connected to the T-type connector.

2. Remove the fixing screws of the ER bus Interface Slave Module. There is one at theupper part and one at the bottom part.

3. Pull the ER bus Interface Slave Module forward and remove it from the base unit.

● Procedure for Installing ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS £

IMPORTANT

Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ER bus Interface Slave Module. As aguideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.

Install the ER bus Interface Slave Module following the steps of the “Procedure for Remov-ing ER Bus Interface Slave Module” in the reverse order.

1. Set the address setting switch of the ER bus Interface Slave Module to be installed tothe same address as the removed ER bus Interface Slave Module.

The settings for ER bus Interface Slave Module are remembered only when the poweron the module. Thus, when the settings are changed while the module are installed inbase unit and with power supply on, the changed settings become valid after therestart the power supply once.

2. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ER bus Interface Slave Module with yourfingers and install it on the base unit.

3. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ERbus Interface Slave Module.

4. Install the communication cable on the installed ER bus Interface Slave Module.

5. Installed the insulation sheet.

Page 202: 6C2001

A7-52<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

■ Replacing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £

● Procedure for Removing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £

1. Make sure the redundant coupler not to be replaced is working normally and thecommunication switch (ENBL/DSBL) is at ENBL position.

2. Turn the communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) of the coupler to be replaced to DSBLposition.

3. Disconnect the T-type branch connector and V net coupler cable together with the Vnet cable.

4. Loosen the two screws that fixing the coupler unit to utility unit.

5. Pull out the V net coupler straightly.

SEE ALSO

For more information about disconnecting V net cable, see the following:

A4.3.4, “Connecting Bus Cables to FFCS”

● Procedure for Installing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £

1. Turn the communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) on the coupler to be installed to DSBLposition.

2. Put the T-type branch connector to the V net coupler unit with V net cable connected.

3. Connect the V net coupler cable to the V net coupler unit.

4. Insert the coupler unit into the deep end of the utility unit and make sure the unit isfirmly connected to the slot at the backboard.

5. Tighten the two screws so as to fix the V net coupler to the utility unit.

6. Turn the communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) on the coupler to ENBL position.

7. Check the front lamps of processor module or the FFCS status display window tomake sure that the V net coupler unit is at normal state.

A070503E.EPS

T-type Branch connector

V net coupler unit

Utility unit

Communication switch

V net cable

Screw

Screw

V net coupler cable

Figure Replacement of V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £

Page 203: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-53

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A7.5.2 Exchange NodeDo the followings for exchanging a node

• Switch off the power supply of the node

• This can be done even the FFCS is running

If this performed while the FFCS is running (online), it is necessary to be very carefulto carry out the following procedures.

■ Procedure of Exchanging Local Node : FFCS £1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O

modules on the FFCS status display window.

2. Switch off the power supply of the node that to be exchanged.

3. Leave the ESB cable connected, then remove the branch connector from the SB401for ESB bus 1.

4. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that there is no abnormality occurredother than the node to be exchanged.

5. Leave the ESB cable connected, then remove the branch connector from the SB401for ESB bus 2.

6. Exchange the node. And confirm that the SB401 address is correct.

7. Connect branch connector to the new SB401.

8. Switch on the node power supply.

9. Confirm that the exchanged node is running properly on the FFCS status displaywindow.

■ Procedure of Adding a Local Node : FFCS £1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O

modules on the FFCS status display window.

2. The branch connector of the node of SB401 needs to be changed to the type withoutterminator. For the dual-redundant bus, this should be performed one side by oneside.

3. Set the new node address before switching on the node power supply. Make sure theaddress setting is correct and not identical. The branch connector with terminatorshould be used if the node is at the end of the bus.

4. Connect the SB401 on the left side of the added node to ESB bus 1.

5. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that the ESB bus 1 is running properly.

6. Do the same to the ESB bus 2.

Page 204: 6C2001

A7-54<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

7. On “System View”, add a new node and configure the node.

8. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that the newly configured node is runningproperly.

SEE ALSO

For more information about the “System View”, see the following:

“■ Creating a New Node: KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £” in F1.5.1, “Creating a Node” in “Reference (IM33S01B30-01E) PART F”

For more information about the “ESB bus branch connectors”, see the following:

“■ Connecting EBS Bus Conector Cales : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A4.3.3, “Connecting the Bus Cablesto KFCS2/KFCS”

■ Procedure of Exchanging Remote Node : FFCS £1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O

modules on the FFCS status display window.

2. Switch off the power supply of the node that to be exchanged.

3. Leave the ER bus cable connected, then remove the T-type branch connector fromthe EB501 for ER bus 1.

4. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that there is no abnormality occurredother than the node to be exchanged.

5. Leave the ER bus cable connected, then remove the T-type branch connector from theEB501 for ER bus 2.

6. Exchange the node. And confirm that the EB501 address is correct.

7. Connect branch connector to the new SB401.

8. Switch on the node power supply.

9. Confirm that the exchanged node is running properly on the FFCS status displaywindow.

■ Procedure of Adding a Remote Node : FFCS £1. Make sure the power of the node unit to be added is off.

2. Set the addresses of the two EB501 modules that are in dual-redundant configuration.For user-defined settings, node numbers need to be set. The addresses for left andright sides are different.

3. At first, connect the standby side. Disconnect the ER bus and connect it to the EB501of the added remote node. Make sure that the left side and right side are not reversed.

4. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that all nodes are running properly exceptthe newly added one.

5. Then connect the ER bus of the other side. Pull out the EB401 so as to switch thecontrol right. At this moment, the communication stops for two or three seconds.

6. Disconnect the ER bus of the newly standby side bus and connect it to EB501. Thenconfirm on FFCS status display window that all nodes are running properly.

Page 205: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-55

IM 33Q06C20-01E

7. Switch on the added node power.

8. On “System View”, add a new node and configure the node.

9. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that the newly configured node is runningproperly.

SEE ALSO

For more information about the node number setting, see the following:

A6.3.8, “ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501)”

For more information about the “ER bus branch connector”, see the following:

“■ Connecting ER Bus Conector Cales : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A4.3.3, “Connecting the Bus Cables toKFCS2/KFCS”

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 206: 6C2001

A7-56<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

A7.5.3 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts HavingDefined Life Spans)Model FFCS has components with a useful life that need to be replaced periodically.The parts having defined life spans, which can be replaced by the user are availableas spare parts and consumables. Purchase and replace as necessary.

Read this section thoroughly and carry out the periodical replacement.

IMPORTANT

Precautions for parts having defined life spans

• The term”Parts having defined life spans” refers to parts that are expected to wear out orbreak down within 10 years from initial use under normal conditions of use and storage.Therefore, parts with expected life spans of 10 years or more are excluded here.

• The recommended replacement cycle is the cycle indicated for preventive mainte-nance. It provides no guarantee against the accidental failures.

• The recommended replacement cycle is merely a guideline. The actual replacementcycle depends on the usage conditions.

• The recommended replacement cycle is subject to change according to actual fieldresults.

■ Parts Having Defined Life Spans : FFCS £The table below shows the recommended part replacement cycles for preventive maintenance.Parts indicated by a “Yes” in the “Replacement by user” column of the table can be replaced bythe user. Parts indicated by a “No” in the “Replacement by user” column cannot be replaced bythe user, so please contact the Yokogawa’s sales agents for replacement.

Table Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans : FFCS £

Part name Part number

Recommended replacement

cycle

Replace-ment

by userRemarks

Battery pack S9129FA

3 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower on average (*1)

Power supply module(100-120V AC)

PW481 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

Power supply module(220-240V AC)

PW482 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

Power supply module(24V DC)

PW484 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

1.5 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower on average (*1)

9 months Yes At the ambient temperature of 50 deg. C or lower on average (*1)

Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (in a power supply module)

(PW481) 8 years No100 - 120 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

(PW482) 8 years No220 - 240 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

(PW484) 8 years No 24 V DC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)

Fuse built in a power supply module

S9109VK 8 years No For PW481

S9109VK 8 years No For PW482

A1546EF 8 years No For PW484

A070504E.EPS

*1: The ambient temperature varies with FFCS installation conditions. When FFCS is installed in the cabinet, the ambienttemperature means the temperature inside the cabinet, not outside the cabinet.

12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00

Page 207: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-57

IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

A7.5.4 How to Replace PartsThis chapter describes replacement of battery pack placed in the processor module.

■ How to Replace Battery Pack : FFCS £

CAUTION

• Use only a battery specified by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.

• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.

• If the memory contents must not be cleared when replacing the battery unit, makesure you leave the power to the FFCS turned on. Turning OFF the battery switchwhen the power is off results in the loss of all the memory contents in the processormodule.

Page 208: 6C2001

A7-58<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

● Battery Life Label : FFCS £

A battery for keeping the contents of main memories is placed in the processor module. Onthe front cover of the module, a label is stuck to indicate the expiration date of the battery.

The battery life varies with the ambient temperatures.

A070505E.EPS

START/STOP

BATTERY

RCV 1 2SND 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTL COPY

BUS1

BUS2

ON

OFF

Processor module

Battery life label

Date of battery life

START/STOP

BATTERYON

OFF

PORT

DOMST A

CN1

CN2

START/STOP switch

Battery

Battery ON/OFF switch

Behind front cover

Connector for battery

ON OFF

BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)

2007.10

Figure Battery Life Label : FFCS £

SEE ALSO

For more information about battery replacement, see the following:

A7.5.3, “Parts Requiring Periodic Replacement (Parts Having Defined Life Spans)”

Page 209: 6C2001

<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-59

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

■ Replacing Battery : FFCS £How to replace the battery is explained as follows.

● Procedure for Removing battery : FFCS £

1. Open the front cover of the processor module.

2. Turn the battery ON/OFF switch to OFF position. A stick of insulation material shouldbe used to toggle the battery switch.

3. Disconnect the battery cable from the connector (displayed as CN2).

The battery cable connector has a self-locking elastic clutch. When pulling out theconnector, it is necessary to push the clutch to unlock it.

4. Pull out the battery pack straightly.

● Procedure for Installing battery : FFCS £

1. Place the battery to the specified position on the processor module.

2. Connect the battery cable to the connector. Make sure the connection is firm and thered wire is facing upward.

3. Turn the battery ON/OFF switch to ON position.

4. Put the front cover back.

5. Stick the battery life label to the front cover.

A070506E.EPS

Processor module

Battery pack

Cable connector

Cover

Elastic clutch

CN2 connector

Battery pack

Cable (red facing upward)

Battery ON/OFFswitch

Battery life label (accessory)

Figure Replacement of Battery : FFCS £

Page 210: 6C2001

A7-60<A7. Maintenance of FCS>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

IMPORTANT

• Replace a battery pack when the validity period expires.

• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.

• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.

• Do not throw a battery pack in a fire.

• Do not disassemble a battery pack.

• Do not use a battery pack other than the model designated by Yokogawa.

• In the battery pack, the nickel metal hydride cells are used, thus the battery is re-chargeable.

Page 211: 6C2001

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CMPL A-1

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Model PFCS Field Control StationModel PFCD Duplexed Field Control StationModel PRK71 I/O Expansion RackProcess I/O Module NestsProcess I/O Modules

CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

CMPL 33Q06C30-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Dec. 2007(YK)

1See pages 2 and 3

2See pages 4 and 5

3See pages 6, 7 and 8

C3031F01E.EPS

1

2

3

PFCDPFCSPRK71

_

Note * : For Suffix code details (indecated by � ), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.

___

_

Duplexed Field Control StationField Control Station

I/O Expansion Rack ( for Models PFCD-�5���* and PFCS-�5���*)

Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty

C3031PL01E.EPS

Page 212: 6C2001

CMPL A-2

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E 2nd Edition Dec.2003-00

To C

To D

To A

To B

CD A

B

22

13

12

17 18

16

15

14

19 20

21

11

10

9

53

4

1

2

7

6

8

C3031F02E.EPS

Page 213: 6C2001

CMPL A-3

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E 5th Edition Dec.2007-00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

10111213

1415

16

1718192021

22

BelowPW701PW702PW704Below

S9578VKS9504VKBelowPW701PW702

PW704BelowS9578VKS9504VKT9085DA

BelowCP701CP703BelowCP701

CP703T9070LQBelowS9762UKS9767UK

S9763UKY9306LKS9941DBAIP521S9764UK

S9628UKAIP521S9764UKS9628UKT9080VR

S9971DBS9766UKS9971DBS9766UKT9085DG

YCB148

YCB118

Note *� : In �, enter 1 in using a single VL net or V net and 2 in using a redundant VL net o V net. This terminator is required when the PFCS is the last device. �** : For suffix code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.

1

1

1

1

1

11

311

11

1

11

1

*�

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

311

11

1111

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

311

11

1111

2

Power Supply UnitFor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply For 24 V DC Power Supply

Fuse

For PW701and PW702For PW704

Power Supply UnitFor 100 to 120 V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply For 24 V DC Power Supply

FuseFor PW701and PW702For PW704

Dummy Plate

CPU Card For Standard Type

For Enhanced Type and Compact TypeCPU CardFor Standard Type

For Enhanced TypeDummy PlatePower Distribution Board UnitFor 100 to 120 V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply

For 24 V DC Power SupplyB.H.Screw, M3 × 6 with Toothed LockwasherContact Output UnitVL net and V net Coupler UnitT-type Connector of VL net and V net for PFCS,PFCD

Connector Unit for V net (10Base5 cable)VL net and V net Coupler UnitT-type Connector of VL net and V net for PFCS,PFCDConnector Unit for V net (10Base5 cable)Dummy Plate

Battery Back Up UnitBattery Assembly Unit (see page CMPL A-10)Battery Back Up UnitBattery Assembly Unit (see page CMPL A-10)Dummy Plate

V net and VL net Terminator (for 10Base2 cable, option code : /*�-TE)

V net Terminator (for 10Base5 cable)

1

1

1

1

11

3111

1

11

1

*�

1

1

1

1

1

11

3111

1

11

1

*�

1

1

1

1

11

3111

11

11

1

*�

1

1

1

1

11

311

11

1

11

1

*�

1

1

1

1

1

11

3111

11

11

1

*�

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

PF

CS

-��

1�**

PF

CS

-��

2�**

PF

CS

-��

3�**

PF

CS

-��

4�**

PF

CD

-��

5�**

PF

CS

-H�

7�**

PF

CS

-H�

8�**

PF

CD

-H�

6�**

C3031PL02E.EPS

Page 214: 6C2001

CMPL A-4

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

Bare Nest Assemblyand

Model PRK71 (I/O Expansion Rack)

1

2

3

4

5

86

7

10

13

11

129(10 through 15)

15

14

9(10 through 15)

C3031F03E.EPS

2nd Edition Dec.2003-00

Page 215: 6C2001

CMPL A-5

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

12345

6789

101112131415

_

T9080EET9085BRT9085BSY9306LB

T9085AZY9306LBS9049PMPRK71

T9085BVT9085BWY9306LBS9049PMT9085BXY9405LB

15112

21081

126412

Bare Nest AssemblyI/O Connector CoverBN Bus Connector Cover

CoverB. H. Screw, M3�6

BracketB.H.Screw, M3�6Insulating BushI/O Expansion Rack(when five I/O module nest install type) Expansion BaseBracketB.H.Screw, M3�6Insulating BushPlateB.H.Screw, M4�5

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty

C3031PL03E.EPS

2nd Edition Dec.2003-00

Page 216: 6C2001

CMPL A-6

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module

A

21

22

23

To A

78 10

9

1112

14

15 16A

13

18

20

19

A

17

24

25

26

28

27

5

6

4

1

2

3

293231

30

33

C3031F04E.EPS

5th Edition Dec.2007-00

Page 217: 6C2001

CMPL A-7

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

[[[[[Option]]]]]

5th Edition Dec.2007-00

1234

5

6

789

1011

121314

1516171819

2021

22

23242526

2728

29

30313233

AMN11T9081EFT9081FBT9081CN

BelowAAM10AAM11AAM11BAAM21

AAM21JAPM11AAM50AAM51

S9393UK

AMN21–––

BelowS9165VM

A1667MRG9307MWAMN31_

_

__

AMN32__

_

BelowAMN33AMN34

Below

ACM11ACM12ACF11

AMC80T9081CVAMN51T9081PVY9406LB

G9311ABBelowACM21ACM22ACM71AMN52

T9081PVY9406LBG9311ABACP71

Note : * See page CMPL A-8 table1 and page CMPL A-9 table2

–––1

––––16

1___

_____

__

_

___

4

4_

_

_

44_

Nest for Analog I/O ModuleDummy Frame (as required)Dummy Case (as required )Sheet (accessory)

Analog I/O ModuleCurrent / Voltage Input ModuleCurrent / Voltage Input ModuleCurrent / Voltage Input Module mV, Thermocouple and RTD Input Module

mV, Thermocouple and RTD Input ModulePulse Input ModuleCurrent Output ModuleCurrent / Voltage Output Module

Temperature Compensation Module for ThermocoupleInput (for Models AAM21 and AAM21J, option code : /RJ )

Nest for Relay I/O Module*Relay I/O Module*

Unit Assembly*Printed Board Assembly*Relay

For Model ADT16A

For Model ADT16BScrew

Nest for Terminal I/O Module*Multiplexer Module*Digital I/O Module*

Unit Assembly*Printed Board Assembly*

Nest for Connector I/O Module*Digital I/O Module*

Unit Assembly*

Printed Board Assembly*Nest

Nest for Communication ModuleNest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module (for CS 3000)

Communication Moduleor Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module

RS-232C Communication ModuleRS-422/RS-485 Communication ModuleField-bus Communication Module

Multipoint Control Analog I/O ModuleDummy Plate (as required)Nest for Communication Card

Dummy Plate (as required)B. H. Screw, M4�6

WasherGeneral-purpose Communication Card

RS-232C Communication CardRS-422/RS-485 Communication CardEthernet Communication Module

Nest for PROFIBUS Communication Module

Dummy Plate (as required)B.H.Screw, M4�6Washer

PROFIBUS Communication Module

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty

C3031PL04E.EPS

Page 218: 6C2001

CMPL A-8

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

Table1. Type of I/O Modules

AMN21(Item 7)

AMN31(Item13)

AMN31(Item13)

I/O Module Unit Assembly Printed Board Assembly

Model Description Model Description

Item 9Item 8 (Relay I/O Module)

Item 14 (Multiplexer Module)

Item 14 (Digital I/O Module)

ADM15R

ADM55R

AMM12T (*1)

AMM22M (*1)

AMM22T (*1)

AMM22TJ (*1)

AMM42T

AMM52T

ADM11T

ADM12T

ADM51T

ADM52T

Relay Input Module

Relay Output Module

Voltage Input Multiplexer Module

mV Input Multiplexer Module

Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module

Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module

2-Wire TransmitterInput Multiplexer Module

OutputMultiplexer Module

Contact Input Module

Contact Input Module

Contact Output Module

Contact Output Module

Item 15

Item 15

ADT16A Terminal Block

ADT16B

AMT16M

AMT16M

AMT16T

AMT16T

AMT16M

AMT16M

ADT16

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

ADT32 Terminal Block

ADT16 Terminal Block

ADT32 Terminal Block

Model Description

Item 10

Item 16

Item 16

ADM15 Relay Input Card

ADM55

AMM12

AMM22

AMM22

AMM22J

AMM42

AMM52

ADM11

Relay Output Card

Voltage Input Multiplexer Card

mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card

mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card

mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card

AMM32TRTD Input Multiplexer Module AMT16R Terminal Block AMM32

RTD Input Multiplexer Card

AMM32TJRTD Input Multiplexer Module AMT16R Terminal Block AMM32J

RTD Input Multiplexer Card

2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Card

Output Multiplexer Card

Contact Input Card

ADM12 Contact Input Card

ADM51 Contact Output Card

ADM52 Contact Output Card

NestModel

C3031F05E.EPS

4th Edition Dec.2006-00

Note *1 : Can also be installed in AMN32 nest.

Page 219: 6C2001

CMPL A-9

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E

Table 2 Type of I/O Modules

AMN32(Item17)

I/O Module Unit Assembly Printed Board Assembly

Model Description Model Description

Item 18 (Digital I/O Module)

ADM11C

ADM12C

ADM51C

ADM52C

Contact Input Module

Contact Input Module

Contact Output Module

Contact Output Module

Item 19

ADC16 Connector Block

ADC32 Connector Block

ADC16 Connector Block

ADC32 Connector Block

Model Description

Item 20

Item 18 (Multiplexer I/O Module) Item 19 Item 20

AMM12CVoltage Input Multiplexer Module with PS Connector

AMC16M Connector Block AMM12Voltage Input Multiplexer Card

AMM22CmV Input MultiplexerModule

AMC16M Connector Block AMM22JmV, TermocoupleInput Multiplexer Card

AMM25CmV Input MultiplexerModule with Thermo-couple Interface

AMC16T Connector Block AMM22JmV, TermocoupleInput Multiplexer Card

AMM32CRTD Input Multiplexer Module

AMC16R Connector Block AMM32RTD Input Multiplexer Card

AMM32CJRTD Input Multiplexer Module

AMC16R Connector Block AMM32JRTD Input Multiplexer Card

ADM11 Contact Input Card

ADM12 Contact Input Card

ADM51 Contact Output Card

ADM52 Contact Output Card

NestModel

C3031F06E.EPS

2nd Edition Dec.2003-00

Page 220: 6C2001

CMPL A-10

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E 5th Edition Dec.2007-00Printed in Japan

Part No. S9766UKBattery Pack Assembly

3

1C3031F07E.EPS

2

123

S9766UKS9765UKY9306LB

112

Battery Pack AssemblyBattery PackB.H.Screw, M3�6

Item Part No. DescriptionQty

C3031PL05E.EPS

Subject to change without notice.

Page 221: 6C2001

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CMPL A-11

Models AFS10S, AFS10D,AFG10S and AFG10DField Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit(for RIO, 19" Rack Mountable Type)

CMPL 33Q06C20-31E

CMPL 33Q06C20-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)

1

C2031F01E.EPS

Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)

1 AFS10SAFG10SAFS10DAFG10D

Item Model DescriptionQty

C2031PL01E.EPS

Page 222: 6C2001

CMPL A-12

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

1819

1516

14

17

1 A

2

9

1011

21

2220

12

13

To A

43

5

C2031F02E.EPS

Page 223: 6C2001

CMPL A-13

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

12345

9

10

1112131415

161718

19202122

T9070CKT9080JTS9024PBS9022PB

AIP601

BelowS9321UKS9322UKS9323UKY9306LE

Y9301WLS9371DBS9528VKT9080MMAIP511

AIP512S9359UKT9080MKAIP511AIP512

S9359UKT9080WXY9306TYS9049PM

11222

1

2

2141

11

1288

FilterBracket Assembly

PlungerGrommet

Fan Unit Assembly

Power Distribution Board Assemblyfor 100 to 120V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply

B.H. Screw, M3�6

WasherPrinted Board Assembly NST EXTIF

FuseDummy PlateRIO bus Coupler Assembly

RIO bus Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for RIO busDummy PlateRIO bus Coupler AssemblyRIO bus Coupler Assembly

Connector Unit for RIO busBracketTapping Screw ( M3 � 6 )Grommet

11222

1

2

2141

11

1288

11222

1

2

21411

1

1

1288

11222

1

2

21411

1

1

1288

11222

1

2

2141

11

1

1288

11222

1

2

2141

11

1

1288

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

AF

G10

S-H

2*A

FS

10S

-H2*

AF

G10

S-H

4*A

FS

10S

-H4*

AF

G10

D*

AF

S10

D*

Note : * For suffix code details , refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.C2031PL02E.EPS

Page 224: 6C2001

CMPL A-14

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

To A or B

To C or L

ToD, E, J or K

ToE, F, I or J

To L

To G or I

A

B

HIJK

L

CDEF

G

C2031F03E.EPS

Page 225: 6C2001

CMPL A-15

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00

1

23

456

789

10

AIP501AIP502

S9628UKBelow

PW301

PW302PW304

S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB

T9080LKRB301CP345

T9080LP

V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply Unit

for 100 to 120V AC Power Supply

for 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply

Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H. Screw, M3 � 6

Dummy PlateRIO bus Master Interface CardProcessor CardDummy Plate

2

21

112

1111

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

2

21

112

1111

222

112

222

222

112

222

AF

G10

S

AF

S10

S

AF

G10

D

AF

S10

D

C2031PL03E.EPS

Page 226: 6C2001

CMPL A-16

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00Printed in Japan

1 2

C2031F04E.EPS

�12

S9364UKS9528VKT9070CK

111

Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter

Item Part No. DescriptionQty

C2031PL04E.EPS

Page 227: 6C2001

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CMPL A-17

Models AFS20S, AFS20D,AFG20S and AFG20DField Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit(for RIO, with Cabinet)CMPL 33Q06C21-31E

CMPL 33Q06C21-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)

1

2

2

2

C2131F01E.EPS

12

Note:*Not included Models AFG20S, AFS20S, AFG20D and AFS20D. 2 panels are necessary when attaching to both sides.

ACB2P

1

Field Control UnitSide Panel* (separately order)

Item Model DescriptionQty

C2131PL01E.EPS

Page 228: 6C2001

CMPL A-18

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

8

7

5

6

12

3

4C2131F02E.EPS

Page 229: 6C2001

CMPL A-19

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

12345

6

7

8

G9307EMS9559UKG9307EM

Below

S9411UKS9431UKS9413UKY9406LK

BelowS9412UKS9432UKS9414UKY9406LK

18141

1

1

1

Field Control Unit (see pages A-22 through A-25)Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16Connector Unit for RIO busHex. H. Bolt, M5�16Nest Power Distribution Board Assembly

For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

B.H. Screw with Toothed Lock washer, M4�6

Nest Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

B.H. Screw withToothed Lock washer, M4�6

Item Part No. DescriptionQty

C2131PL02E.EPS

Page 230: 6C2001

CMPL A-20

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

A

1

68

7

17

910

12

11

5

4

3

2

13

15

14

16

View A

2221

23

18

19

20

24

C2131F03E.EPS

Page 231: 6C2001

CMPL A-21

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

1

23

456

789

10

1112

1314151617

1819202122

2324

S9324UKS9511AT

S9725VMY9306LB

BelowS9566UKS9567UK

S9313UKT9080PXG9311ACY9406LK

Below

S9566UKS9567UKS9313UKT9080PXG9311AC

Y9406LKT9080PZY9314LBT9019FFG9307EM

T9080QCY9314LBT9019FFT9080PZY9314LB

T9019FFT9080EE

Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module

(option, see pages A-28 through A-31)Power Distribution Board Frame Assembly Printed Board Assembly

Relay B.H.Screw,M3�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power Supply

For 24V DC Power Supply Shaft WasherB.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly

For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply Shaft Washer

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 RetainerHex.H.Bolt,M5�16

Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 RetainerDummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14

RetainerCover(as required)

11

111

111

1114

11111

1–

Item Part No. Description

Mod

el

Qty

11

111

1111

11

1

4

11

1–

AF

�20

�-H

�1�

*3

AF

�20

D-H

42�

*3

Note:*For suffix code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.C2131PL03E.EPS

Page 232: 6C2001

CMPL A-22

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E

Field Control Unit Processor Card

3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

C

To C

9

8

7To A and B

10

2

1

4

3

A

B

C2131F04E.EPS

5

6

Page 233: 6C2001

CMPL A-23

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

1

23

456

789

10

AIP501AIP502S9628UK

BelowPW301

PW302PW304S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB

T9080LKRB301CP345T9080LP

V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply UnitFor 100 to 120V AC Power Supply

For 220 to 240V AC Pwer SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H.Screw, M3�6

Dummy PlateRIO bus Master Interface CardProcessor CardDummy Plate

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

2

21

112

1111

222

212

222

222

212

222

AF

G20

S

AF

G20

D

AF

S20

S

AF

S20

D

2

21

112

1111

C2131PL04E.EPS

Page 234: 6C2001

CMPL A-24

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

Field Control Unit

1617

1314

12

15

1110

8

9

6

5

7

1

C2131F05E.EPS

Page 235: 6C2001

CMPL A-25

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

15678

910111213

141516

17

AIP601T9080KWY9406LBY9406LBS9612AT

S9528VKT9080JQY9306LBT9080MMAIP511

AIP512S9359UKT9080MKAIP511AIP512S9359UK

21121

91111

111

1

Fan Unit AssemblyDummy PlateB.H.Screw, M4�6B.H.Screw, M3�6Printed Board Assembly (External Interface Unit)

FuseCoverB.H.Screw, M3�6Dummy PlateRIO bus Coupler Assembly (for Model AF�*20S-H4)

RIO bus Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for RIO busDummy Plate (for Model AF�*20S-H2)RIO bus Coupler AssemblyRIO bus Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for RIO bus

21121

9111

11

11

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

AF

�*2

0S

AF

�*2

0D

Note : *For suffix code details (indicated by �),refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.C2131PL05E.EPS

Page 236: 6C2001

CMPL A-26

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E

1

12

2

4

3

To D

To C

To B

To A

DC

BA

96

5

8

7

10

C2131F06E.EPS

3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

Page 237: 6C2001

CMPL A-27

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E

1

234

BelowS9415UK

S9417UK

Y9406LKS9559UKG9307EM

2

214

I/O Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power Supply and220 to 240V AC Power Supply For 24V DC Power Supply

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Connector Unit for RIO busHex.H.Bolt M5�16

Item Part No. DescriptionQty

C2131PL06E.EPS

3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

5

6

789

10

Note : *For option code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.

BelowPW401PW402PW404

T9081AY

RB401T9081AWT9080EE

1 to 3

1 to 3

1 to 31 to 3

Power Supply UnitFor 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Dummy Plate

RIO bus Slave Interface CardDummy PlateCover (as required)Process I/O Module Nest andProcess I/O Module (see pages A-28 through A-31)

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionO

ptio

n C

ode

/�*–

NS

F1

/�*–

NS

R1

/�*–

NS

F2

/�*–

NS

R2

/�*–

ND

F4

/�*–

ND

R4

Qty

2 to 6

1 to 31 to 3

2 to 6

2 to 6

[ Option ]

C2131PL07E.EPS

Page 238: 6C2001

CMPL A-28

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E

Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module

5

2

1

3

4

6

21

A

22 23

To A

13

A

16

14

15

17

A

20

18

19

7

128

9

1011

C2131F07E.EPS

3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

Page 239: 6C2001

CMPL A-29

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

1

234

5

6

78

9

10

1112

1314

15161718

192021

22

23

Note: *For quantity details (indicated by ) , refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.

AMN11AMN12T9081EFT9081FBT9081CN

BelowAAM10AAM11AAM11BAAM21AAM21JAPM11

AAM50AAM51S9393UK

AMN21ADM15R

ADM55RADT16AADT16BS9165VMA1667MR

G9307MWADM15ADM55AMN32

AMN31

BelowAMN33AMN34

Below

ACM11ACM12ACF11AMC80T9081CV

1

111616

111

Nest for Analog I/O ModuleHigh-Speed Nest for I/O Analog Module

Dummy Frame (as required)Dummy Case (as required)Sheet

Analog I/O ModuleCurrent/Voltage Input ModuleCurrent/Voltage Input ModuleCurrent/Voltage Input Module (supports BRAIN)mV,Thermocouple and RTD Input ModulemV,Thermocouple and RTD Input ModulePulse Input Module

Current Output ModuleCurrent/Voltage Output Module

Temperature Compensation Module for ThermocoupleInput (for Model AAM21, option:/RJ)

Nest for Relay I/O ModuleRelay Input Module

Relay Output ModuleTerminal Block (for ADM15R)Terminal Block (for ADM55R)

Relay (for ADT16A)Relay (for ADT16B)

ScrewRelay Input Card (for ADM15R)Relay Output Card (for ADM55R)

Nest for Connector I/O ModuleDigital I/O Module

Unit AssemblyPrinted Board Assembly

Nest for Terminal I/O ModuleMultiplexer ModuleDigital I/O Module

Unit AssemblyPrinted Board Assembly

NestFor Communication ModuleFor Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module

Communication Module or Multipoint Control Analog I/O ModuleRS-232C Communication ModuleRS-422/RS-485 Communication ModuleField-bus Communication ModuleMultipoint Control Analog I/O Module

Dummy Plate (as required)

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty*

See Table 1(page A-30)

See Table 2(page A-31)

C2131PL08E.EPS

Page 240: 6C2001

CMPL A-30

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

Model(Item14)

Model(Item15)Model

(Item16)

DescriptionDescription

Description

Dig

ital I

/O M

odul

e

ADM11C

ADM12C

ADM51C

ADM52C

Contact Input Module(16 points, connector type)

Contact Input Module(32 points, connector type)

Contact Output Module(16 points, connector type)

Contact Output Module(32 points, connector type)

ADC16

ADM11

ADC32

ADM12

ADC16

ADM51

ADC32

ADM52

Connector Block

Connector Block

Connector Block

Connector Block

Contact Input Card

Contact Input Card

Contact Output Card

Contact Output Card

Mul

tiple

xer

Mod

ule

(Con

nect

or T

ype)

AMM12C

AMM22C

AMM25C

AMM32C

Voltage Inpurt Multiplexer Module with PS Connector

mV Input Multipexer Module (16 points, connector type)

mV Input Multiplexer Module with Thermocouple Interface(15 points, connector type)

RTD Input Multiplexer Module (16 points, connector type)

AMC16M

AMM12

AMC16M

AMM22J

AMC16T

AMM22J

AMC16R

AMM32

Connector Block

Connector Block

Connector Block

Connector Block

Contact Input Card

Contact Input Card

Contact Input Card

Contact Intput Card

AMM32CJRTD Input Multiplexer Module(16 points, connector type)

AMC16R

AMM32J

Connector Block

Contact Inputt Card

Table1. Type of I/O Modules into the Model AMN32 (Item13)

C2131F09E.EPS

Page 241: 6C2001

CMPL A-31

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00

Model(Item 18)

Model(Item19)Model

(Item20)Description

Description

Description

Mul

tiple

xer

Mod

ule

16 p

oint

s, T

erm

inal

Typ

e an

d S

can

Per

iod

1 S

ec.

AMM12T

AMM22M

AMM22T

AMM22TJ

Voltage Input Multiplexer Module

mV Input Multiplexer Module

Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module

Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module

AMT16M

AMM12

AMT16M

AMM22

AMT16T

AMM22

AMT16T

AMM22J

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Voltage Input Multiplexer Card

mV,Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card

mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card

mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card

AMM32TJ RTD Input Multiplexer ModuleAMT16R

AMM32J

Terminal Block

RTD Input Multiplexer Card

AMM32T RTD Input Multiplexer ModuleAMT16R

AMM32

Terminal Block

RTD Input Multiplexer Card

Dig

ital I

/O M

odul

e

AMM42T

AMM52T

ADM11T

ADM12T

ADM51T

ADM52T

2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Module

Output Multiplexer Module

Contact Input Module(16 points, terminal type)

Contact Input Module(32 points, terminal type)

Contact Output Module(16 points, terminal type)

Contact Output Module(32 points, terminal type)

AMT16M

AMM42

AMT16M

AMM52

ADT16

ADM11

ADT32

ADM12

ADT16

ADM51

ADT32

ADM52

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

Terminal Block

2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Card

Output Multiplexer Card

Contact Input Card

Contact Input Card

Contact Output Card

Contact Output Card

Table2. Type of I/O Modules into the Model AMN31 (Item17)

C2131F10E.EPS

Page 242: 6C2001

CMPL A-32

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E

Door Fan Assemly and Accessory Assembly

11

1312

9

7

6

8

5

C2131F08E.EPS

1

10

5th Edition Jan. 2006-00Printed in Japan

1567

89

10

111213

AIP601T9070CB

Below

S9441DD

S9442DDY9306LBY9408LK

S9090UG

S9361UKS9528VKT9070CB

4221

44

1

112

Fan Unit AssemblyAir FilterFan Frame Assembly

Printed Board AssemblyFor Front Door

For Rear DoorB.H.Screw,M3�6

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lockwasher, M4�8Temperature Sensor Assembly(with front door)

Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty

C2131PL09E.EPS

Page 243: 6C2001

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CMPL A-33

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Models AFS30S, AFS30DAFG30S and AFG30DField Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit(for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable Type)CMPL 33Q06N10-31E

CMPL 33Q06N10-31E1st Edition : Sep. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)

1

N1031F01E.EPS

Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)

1 AFS30SAFS30DAFG30SAFG30D

����

Item Model DescriptionQty

N1031PL01E.EPS

Page 244: 6C2001

CMPL A-34

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

Models AFS30S, AFS30D, AFG30S and AFG30DField Control Unit

15

14

16

1 A

2

9

1011

19

20

18

12

13

To A

43

5

17

N1031F02E.EPS

14a

Page 245: 6C2001

CMPL A-35

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

12345

9

10

11121314

14a

151617181920

T9070CKT9080JTS9024PBS9022PBAIP601

BelowS9321UKS9322UKS9323UKY9306LE

Y9301WLS9371DBS9528VKT9080MMS9039FA

AIP532T9080MKAIP532T9082KDY9306TYS9049PM

FilterBracket Assembly

PlungerGrommet

Fan Unit Assembly

Power Distribution Board Assemblyfor 100 to 120V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply

B.H. Screw, M3�6

WasherPrinted Board Assembly NST EXTIF

FuseDummy PlateRS-422 Unit(for Models AFS30D-HE and AFG30D-HE)

ESB bus Coupler AssemblyDummy PlateESB bus Coupler AssemblyBracketTapping Screw ( M3�6 )Grommet

11222

1

2

2141

11288

11222

1

2

21411

1

1288

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

AF

S30

S-H

2*A

FG

30S

*

AF

S30

S-H

4*A

FS

30D

*A

FG

30S

-H4*

AF

G30

D*

Note : * For suffix code details , refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.N1031PL02E.EPS

Page 246: 6C2001

CMPL A-36

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

3

To C or K

7

ToD, H or J

A

B

GHJ

K

CDE

12

To K

4

5

6

1

To A or B

2

F

ToE or H

8

11

To G or F

N1031F03E.EPS

9

10

Page 247: 6C2001

CMPL A-37

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00

1

23

456

789

10——1112

AIP501AIP502S9628UK

BelowPW301

PW302PW304S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB

T9080LKSB301SB311

A1397WLG9320FJS9073PBCP345T9080LP

V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply Unit

for 100 to 120V AC Power Supply

for 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply

Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H. Screw, M3 � 6

Dummy PlateESB Bus Interface Master ModuleESB Bus Interface Master Module(with SOE communication function,for Models AFS30D-HE and AFG30D-HE)

Cable Asembly (for SB311)Clamp (not shown, for A1397WL)Band (not shown, for A1397WL)Processor CardDummy Plate

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

2

21

112

11

11

222

112

222

2222

AF

S30

SA

FG

30S

AF

S30

DA

FG

30D

N1031PL03E.EPS

Page 248: 6C2001

CMPL A-38

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00Printed in Japan

Accessory Assembly

1 2

N1031F04E.EPS

�12

S9364UKS9528VKT9070CK

111

Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter

Item Part No. DescriptionQty

N1031PL04E.EPS

Page 249: 6C2001

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CMPL A-39

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Models AFS40S, AFS40DAFG40S and AFG40DField Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)Duplexed field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)

CMPL 33Q06N20-31E

CMPL 33Q06N20-31E1st Edition : Sep. 2001(YK)6th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)

1

2

2

2

N2031F01E.EPS

12IM 33Y06K01-90E 1 Explosion Protect Manual (option code : /ATDOC)*2

Note : *1 Not included Models AFS40S, AFS40D, AFG40S and AFG40D.2 panels are necessary when attaching to both sides.

*2 For suffix code details, refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.

�ACB2P

1�

Field Control UnitSide Panel*1 (separately order)

Item Model DescriptionQty

N2031PL01E.EPS

Page 250: 6C2001

CMPL A-40

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

12

4

3

6

5

7

8 N2031F02E.EPS

Page 251: 6C2001

CMPL A-41

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

123

45

67

8

Note : * For the composed parts of Models ANB10S and ANB10D details, refer to CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E.

�G9307EM

BelowS9894UKS9895UK

S9896UKG9307EM

BelowS9881UKS9884UK

S9882UKG9307EM

BelowANB10S*ANB10D*G9307EM

181

11

40 to 5

0 to 20

Field Control Unit (see pages CMPL-46 through CMPL-49)Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16FCU Power Distribution Board Assembly

For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power Supply

For 24V DC Power SupplyHex. H. Bolt, M5�16Primary Power Distribution Board Assembly (Front)

For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power Supply

For 24V DC Power SupplyHex. H. Bolt, M5�16Process I/O Node Unit for ESB bus

For SingleFor Dual-Redundant

Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16

Item Part No. DescriptionQty

N2031PL02E.EPS

Page 252: 6C2001

CMPL A-42

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

View A

57

6

16

89

11

10

4

3

2

1

12

14

13

15

2120

22

17

18

19

A

N2031F03E.EPS

Page 253: 6C2001

CMPL A-43

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

12345

67

89

1011121314

1516171819

202122

S9324UKS9511ATS9725VMY9306LB

Below

S9887UKS9888UKS9313UKT9080PXG9311AC

Y9406LKBelow

S9887UKS9888UKS9313UK

T9080PXG9311ACY9406LKT9080PZY9314LB

T9019FFG9307EMT9080QCY9314LBT9019FF

T9080PZY9314LBT9019FF

Power Distribution Board Frame Assembly Printed Board Assembly Relay B.H.Screw,M3�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly

For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power Supply For 24V DC Power Supply Shaft Washer

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Main Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Shaft Washer

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14

RetainerHex.H.Bolt,M5�16Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 Retainer

Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 Retainer

11111

11

1

11

14111

111

Item Part No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

11111

11

11

111

4

111

11111

11

1

1

4

111

AF

S40

S-H

�1�

*A

FG

40S

-H�

1�*

AF

S40

D-H

41�

*A

FG

40D

-H41

�*

AF

S40

D-H

42�

*A

FG

40D

-H42

�*

Note:*For suffix code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.N2031PL03E.EPS

Page 254: 6C2001

CMPL A-44

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

2

1

3

4N2031F04E.EPS

Page 255: 6C2001

CMPL A-45

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

1

2

3

4

Note : * For the composed parts of Models ANB10S and ANB10D details, refer to CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E.

BelowS9881UKS9884UKS9882UKG9307EM

BelowANB10S*ANB10D*G9307EM

1

4

0 to 5

0 to 20

Primary Power Distribution Board Assembly (Rear)For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16

Process I/O Node Unit for ESB busFor SingleFor Dual-Redundant

Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16

Item Part No. DescriptionQty

N2031PL04E.EPS

Page 256: 6C2001

CMPL A-46

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E

Field Control Processor Card

6th Edition Jan. 2006-00

CTo C

11

8

7To A and B

12

2

1

4

3

A

B

N2031F05E.EPS

6

5

9

10

Page 257: 6C2001

CMPL A-47

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00

1

23

456

789

10— —1112

AIP501AIP502S9628UK

BelowPW301

PW302PW304S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB

T9080LKSB301SB311

A1397WLG9320FJS9073PBCP345T9080LP

V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply Unit

For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply

For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H.Screw, M3�6

Dummy PlateESB Bus Interface Master ModuleESB Bus Interface Master Module(with SOE communication function, for Models AFS40D-HE and AFG40D-HE)

Cable Assembly (for SB311)Clamp (not shown, for A1397WL)Band (not shown, for A1397WL)Processor CardDummy Plate

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

2

21

112

11

11

222

212

222

2462

AF

S40

SA

FG

40S

AF

S40

DA

FG

40D

N2031PL05E.EPS

Page 258: 6C2001

CMPL A-48

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E

Field Control Unit

6th Edition Jan. 2006-00

15

13

12

14

1110

8

9

6

5

7

1

N2031F06E.EPS

12a

Page 259: 6C2001

CMPL A-49

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00

15678

9101112

12a

13

14

15

AIP601T9080KWY9406LBY9406LBS9612AT

S9528VKT9080JQY9306LBT9080MMS9039FA

AIP532

AIP532T9080MK

AIP532

21121

9111

1

1

1

Fan Unit AssemblyDummy PlateB.H.Screw, M4�6B.H.Screw, M3�6Printed Board Assembly(External Interface Unit)

FuseCoverB.H.Screw, M3�6Dummy PlateRS-422 Unit (for Models AFS40D-HE and AFG40D-HE)

ESB bus Coupler Assembly(for Model AFS40S-H4)ESB bus Coupler AssemblyDummy Plate(for Model AFS40S-H2 and AFG40S-H2)ESB bus Coupler Assembly

21121

91111

1

1

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

AF

S40

SA

FG

40S

AF

S40

DA

FG

40D

N2031PL06E.EPS

Page 260: 6C2001

CMPL A-50

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00Printed in Japan

Door Fan Assembly and Accessory Assembly

11

1312

9

7

6

8

5

N2031F07E.EPS

1

10

N2031PL07E.EPS

1567

89

10

111213

AIP601T9070CB

Below

S9441DD

S9442DDY9306LBY9408LK

S9090UG

S9361UKS9528VKT9070CB

4221

44

1

112

Fan Unit AssemblyAir FilterFan Frame Assembly

Printed Board AssemblyFor Front Door

For Rear DoorB.H.Screw,M3�6

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lockwasher, M4�8Temperature Sensor Assembly(with front door)

Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty

Page 261: 6C2001

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CMPL A-51

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Models AFF50S and AFF50DField Control Unit(for FIO, 19-inch Rack Mountable)

CMPL 33Q06N30-31E

CMPL 33Q06N30-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2003(YK)4th Edition : Dec. 2007(YK)

N3031F01E.EPS

1

Field Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit

1 AFF50SAFF50D

��

Item Model DescriptionQty

N3031PL01E.EPS

Page 262: 6C2001

CMPL A-52

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N30-31E 4th Edition Dec.2007-00

N3031F02E.EPS

16

14

9

5

6

410

8

192220

21

18

To A

To B

To C

To D

To A

2324

24 23

2512

11

7

13

15

17

3

2

1

D

C

B

29

26

28

Accessory

A

27

Page 263: 6C2001

CMPL A-53

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N30-31E

*1 : Basic type

*2 : With ISA Standard G3 option

1

234

5678

9101112

13

1415

16

1718

19

20212223

242526272829

S9100FAS9148FAT9082QEY9306LBCP401-10

CP401-11T9083CBS9129FAS9343UVCP401-10

CP401-11T9083CBS9129FAS9343UVT9083LY

BelowPW481-10PW482-10PW484-10

BelowPW481-11PW482-11PW484-11

T9088MEBelow

PW481-10PW482-10PW484-10

BelowPW481-11PW482-11PW484-11T9088ME

ADCV02Below

S9103FAS9113FAS9114FA

BelowS9151FAS9152FAS9153FAY9322LB

Y9301WLG9311AAS9528VKAIP504-10AIP504-11

S9112BLT9022RAT9022RTS9049PMT9070UQA1054JA

1

141

112

1

1

1

11

2

2212

211842

1

141

1121

112

1

11

1

1

2

2212

21184

114

1112

1

1

1

1

1

2

221

2

211842

114

1112

1112

1

1

1

1

1

2

221

2

21184

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM

odel

Qty

AF

F50

S*1

AF

F50

D*1

AF

F50

S*2

AF

F50

D*2

N3031PL02E.EPS

CPU Node UnitCPU Node Unit

Cable TrayB.H.Screw, M3�6Processor Module

Processor ModuleCoverBattery Kit

Cable AssemblyProcessor Module

Processor Module CoverBattery Kit

Cable AssemblyDummy Cover

Power Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply

Power Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply

CoverPower Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply

Power Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply Cover

Dummy CoverCPU Node External Inferface Unitfor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supplyfor 24 V DC Power Supply

CPU Node External Inferface Unitfor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supplyfor 24 V DC Power SupplyB.H.Screw, M3�22

Toothed Lock WasherWasherFuse (1.6A)

V net Coupler Unit V net Coupler Unit

V net Connector UnitLabel (BUS1)Label (BUS2)Insulating Bush(accessory)Cover (for V net cable, accessory)Dust Cover

4th Edition Dec.2007-00Printed in JapanSubject to change without notice.

Page 264: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 265: 6C2001

<B1. Cabinet> B1-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

B1. CabinetIn part B, the CENTUM CS3000 input and output extension cabinets are explained.

• ACB21 I/O Expansion Cabinet (CS 3000 RIO)

• ACB41 I/O Expansion Cabinet (CS 3000 FIO)

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 266: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 267: 6C2001

<B2. *** This section is blank. ***> B2-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

B2. *** This section is blank. ***

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 268: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 269: 6C2001

<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41The ACB21/ACB41 is a cabinet for installing node interface units (NIUs), rack mount-able nodes, rack mountable nodes with an I/O expansion rack, and I/O units of aCENTUM CS 3000 system. An ACB21/ACB41 can be installed side-by-side with afield control station (KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFCS with cabinet) as well as indepen-dently.

SEE ALSO

• For more information I/O equipment, see the following:

“Input & Output Modules”, in (IM 33Y06K01-01E)

• For more information Field Control Station (KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFCS with cabinet), see the follow-ing :

“Part A Field Control Station”

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 270: 6C2001

B3-2<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

B3.1 Installation of Node Inside ACB21/ACB41This section describes how the nodes are installed in the ACB21/ACB41.

■ Installation : KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFCS £In an ACB21, up to three nodes can be installed on each of the front and rear sides, andrack mountable nodes can also be installed.

In an ACB41, up to four node units for FIO can be installed on each of the front and rearsides, and rack mountable nodes can also be installed.

The figure below shows how those nodes are installed in ACB21/ACB41.

Front RearACB21-S1 ACB21-S2 ACB21-S3

Front Rear Front Rear

B030101E.EPS

Node Rack mountable node

Front RearACB41-S1

Node for FIONode for FIONode for FIO

Node for FIO

Node for FIONode for FIONode for FIO

Node for FIO

ACB4-S1

Front Rear

FFCS

FFCS

FFCS

FFCS

ACB41-S1

Front Rear

FFCS

Node for FIONode for FIO

Node for FIO

19-inch rackequipment mounting

Figure Installation of Nodes in ACB41/ACB21 : KFCS2/KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2/LFCS £

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 271: 6C2001

<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

B3.2 Installation and Wiring for ACB21/ACB41This section describes the maintenance area, installation, and wiring of the ACB21/ACB41.

CAUTION

With nodes installed, an ACB21/ACB41 weighs nearly 400 kgf. Allow enough workspacefor installation, and carry out the installation with more than one person while ensuringsafety.

SEE ALSO

For more information about installation, see the following:

CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance, TI 33Q01J10-01E, for the installation procedure.

11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00

Page 272: 6C2001

B3-4<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

B3.2.1 ACB21/ACB41 Maintenance AreaInstallation of the ACB21/ACB41 requires a maintenance area for maintenance. Thissection describes the maintenance area.

■ Maintenance Area for ACB21/ACB41 £When determining the installation location of an ACB21/ACB41, make sure that there issufficient maintenance area around the ACB21/ACB41 for the following reasons:

• Required for normal operation.

• Required for air suction and exhaust of cooling fans.

• Required for periodic maintenance to maintain stable operation of equipment.

• Required for servicing in case of equipment failure.

The figure below shows the maintenance area required around an ACB21/ACB41 wheninstalled. Secure this area.

F

Tolerance 2 4 6 8

L 600 1200 1800 2400

Number of ACB21/ACB41s Installed Side-by-side 1 2 3 4

Width

Note: ACB21/ACB41s can be installed side-by-side.

B030201E.EPS

1000

650

L+50

800

1000

Unit: mm

Figure Maintenance Area for ACB21/ACB41 £

8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

Page 273: 6C2001

<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-5

IM 33Q06C20-01E

B3.2.2 Installing an ACB21/ACB41This section describes the installation of the ACB21/ACB41.

■ Installation £1. First, confirm that the following item and works are completed by the user or contrac-

tor as per the drawings:

• Anchor bolts

• Installation rack

• Openings for wiring on the floor

Be extremely careful about the fitting between the anchor bolt holes of the channel baseand the positions of the anchor bolts.

2. Install the ACB21/ACB41 as specified in the equipment arrangement drawing.

3. Avoid physical shock and do not use a crowbar or the like.

SEE ALSO

For more information about installation, see the CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance “TI 33Q01J10-01E.”

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 274: 6C2001

B3-6<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>

IM 33Q06C20-01E 8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

B3.2.3 Wiring for ACB21/ACB41This section describes the connection of the power supply cable and groundingcable to the ACB21/ACB41.

■ Connecting the Power Supply Cable to ACB21/ACB41 £The figure below shows the power supply wiring for an ACB21/ACB41. Power distributionboard is not provided for ACB21-S3000 and ACB41-S3000.

Grounding Bar for Connecting the Grounding Wire (not insulated from cabinet)

Power distribution board (For dual-line power supplies)

Power supply (terminal screws: M6)

Power supply (terminal screws: M6)

The dual-line power supplies are only provided for the cabinet with duplexed NIU, duplexed Nodes or duplexed field control units.

TM1 L N NTM1 L

B030202E.EPS

Front

Connection of Grounding Wire Connections of Power Supply and READY Contact Output

Grounding Bar for Shield Wires(isolated from the cabinet)

Terminal for Grounding Wire: M8 hexagon bolt

Junction terminals: M5 screws

Grounding bus

Figure Power Supply Wiring for ACB21/ACB41 £

Page 275: 6C2001

<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-7

IM 33Q06C20-01E 8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

● Connections £

Lead the power supply cable into the cabinet through a round hole of a seven-piece bottomplate; the power supply input terminals on the power distribution board are directly abovethe hole. This is the same for dual-line power supplies.

CAUTION

• Wire the power cable through the conduit at the desk entrance for the following rea-sons:

• To prevent damage to the cable due to contact with a metal plate.

• To avoid applying excessive weight on the solderless lugs or power connectionterminals due to the weight of the cable.

• Turn off the main power supply, and perform work after confirming with a tester thatthere is no power in the power cable to be connected.

• After the power cable has been connected, turn on the power to the power cable withthe breaker in the power panel turned OFF. Then, confirm with a tester that normalpower is being supplied to the power connection terminal.

• Wire the power cable so that a distance of 1 cm or more is maintained from othersignal lines.

1. For the power cable, an 8 mm2 cable or thicker is recommended.

2. Provide terminal treatment for the end of the cable, and crimp a ring-tongue crimp-onlug (for an M6 screw) onto each wire.

3. Detach the protection cover for the terminal strip TM1 on the power distribution board.

4. Connect the non-grounded side of the power supply wires to terminal L, and thegrounded side to N.

5. After connecting the power cable, turn on the power supply to the cabinet while leav-ing the circuit breaker on the power distribution board OFF. Then, use a circuit tester tocheck that the power is supplied at the power supply terminals.

6. Replace the protection cover.

This completes the power supply wiring.

Page 276: 6C2001

B3-8<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Connecting the Grounding Cable to ACB21/ACB41Be sure to ground the equipment in order to avoid the electric shock of the operator andmaintenance engineers and to prevent the influence of external noise.

The grounding bar is shown on the page before the preceding one.

CAUTION

When grounding the cabinet, connect the grounding cable to the designated protectivegrounding terminal.

1. The grounding resistance must be 100 ohm or less. Do not share the grounding withequipment of other systems.

2. For the grounding bus, use a 22 mm2 cable or thicker.

3. The grounding bar for connecting grounding wires is at the bottom front of the cabinetand is not isolated from the cabinet casing.

4. Ground the equipment inside the cabinet to the junction terminals (M5 screws) on thegrounding bar.

SEE ALSO

For more information about installation, see the CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance “TI 33Q01J10-01E.”

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 277: 6C2001

<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-9

IM 33Q06C20-01E

■ Wiring for Contact Outputs of ACB41This section describes the wiring between the contact outputs of ACB41 and the house-keeping unit (hereinafter referred to as HKU). The terminal board of the contact outputs isplaced at the lower part of the cabinet. The diagnosis signals of the internal temperature ofthe cabinet and the fans are sent to the CPU though the HKU and the connected FIOmodules. To enable the housekeeping capability, the corresponding software application isrequired.

CAUTION

• All equipment connected to a contact output, including the signal wires, junctionterminals, relays, and power supply unit, should comply with CSA1010 or CSA950 (fora 100-120 V AC power supply), or EN61010-1 (for a 220-240 V AC power supply).

• When performing wiring for the READY output terminals, attach the clamp filter (partNo. A1193MN, included in accessories) near the terminals.

• The cable connected to the READY (processor status contact output) terminals shouldrun at least 1 cm from other signal cables since a high voltage is applied to it.

The figure below shows the terminal board of the contact outputs and HKU.

B030203E.EPS

HKUContact outputsPower distribution board (Front) Power distribution board (Rear)

ACB41 (Front) ACB41 (Rear)

Figure The Contact Output Terminal and HKU £

9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00

Page 278: 6C2001

B3-10<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● Contact Output Wiring £

Make sure of the following when using the contact output:

• Avoid applying an AC voltage directly to the contact output terminal. Use a voltageless than the rated.

• When this contact directly drives an external relay or the like, use a spark killer toprotect the relay contact.

The figures below show the contact output terminals of an ACB41 cabinet and an exampleof using a spark killer.

B030204E.EPS

READY

RL1

NO NC C

CN1(REARD-FAN)FUSE

CN2(FRONTD-FAN)

D1

D2

RDYRL1

FRONTD-FAN

D3

D4

REARD-FAN

Contact output terminal

Figure Contact Output Terminal £

B030205E.EPS

Contact Contact

Powersupply

Powersupply

Inductive loard such as solenoid valve

Inductiveload

Contact Protection by CR Circuit

External circuitDCS

Contact Protection by Diode

Figure Use of Spark Killer £

Under the following circumstances, the contact is triggered, i.e., changes from Open toClose state.

• HKU abnormal.

• Fan alarm occurs.

• Temperature alarm occurs

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 279: 6C2001

<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-11

IM 33Q06C20-01E

● HKU Features £

The Open or Close states of the contacts are indicated by the HKU status lamps (LED).

• RDY : Unlit if HKU shows an error

• FAN ALARM : Lit if the lamp encounters an error

• TEMP ALARM : Lit if cabinet temperature is abnormal

Specification of HKU Contacts :

• Rated Voltage : 250V AC. 30V DC

• Rated Current : 2A

• Rated Load : 125VA

RDY

FAN ALARM

TEMP ALARM

FRONTD-FAN

D1

D2

D4

D3REARD-FAN

AIR IN

AIR OUT

B030206E.EPS

RDY lamp

FRONT D-FAN (D1, D2)Lamps for the fans on the front door

REAR D-FAN (D3, D4)Lamps for the fans on the back door

TEMP ALARMLamps for the cabinet internal temperature

Figure Status Lamps of HKU £

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 280: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 281: 6C2001

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CMPL B-1

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CMPL 33Y06K50-31E

CMPL 33Y06K50-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2003(YK)3rd Edition : Mar. 2005(YK)

Terminal BoardsTerminal BlocksRelay Boards

Terminal Blocks

3

4

2

1

To Cabinet or Rack

To Cabinet or Rack

5

6

7

8

To Cabinet or Rack

To Cabinet or Rack

K5031F01E.EPS

TE16T9041RYTE32T9041RZTETC

T9041RYTERTT9041RZ

–1–1–

1–1

16-point Terminal BlockCover

32-point Terminal BlockCover

Terminal Block for Thermocouple

CoverTerminal Block for RTS

Cover

Item Model DescriptionQty

12345

678

K5031PL01E.EPS

Page 282: 6C2001

CMPL B-2

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 1st Edition Dec.2003-00

General-Purpose terminal Board(Connector Type, for Digital Input Module)

3

4

4

To Cabinet or Rack

1

2

2

To Cabinet or Rack

8

9

9

To Cabinet or Rack

10

11

11

To Cabinetor Rack

5

To Cabinet or Rack

67

K5031F02E.EPS

Page 283: 6C2001

CMPL B-3

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 1st Edition Dec.2003-00

MUB

T9041RYMUD

T9041RZMCMY9305LBT9041RDMTC

T9041RYMRTT9041RZ

2–

2–21–

2–2

General-purpose Terminal Board(16 point board�2)

CoverGeneral-purpose Terminal Board(32 point board�2, : for ST5, ST6 and ST7)

CoverTerminal Board for Control I/O

B.H.Screw, M3�5Cover

Terminal Board for Thermocouple

CoverTerminal Board for RTD

Cover

Item Model DescriptionQty

1

23

45678

91011

K5031PL02E.EPS

Page 284: 6C2001

CMPL B-4

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 1st Edition Dec.2003-00

MRI Relay Input Board

10

8

1

2

3

4

To Cabinetor Rack

K5031F03E.EPS

10

8

1 2

5

7

67

5

5

7

7

To Cabinetor Rack

K5031F04E.EPS

Page 285: 6C2001

CMPL B-5

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 3rd Edition Mar.2005-00

12345

6789

10

A1725MRA1330EFS9430VKS9431VKS9380VK

S9381VKY9304LBT9056HYT9056HVY9314LB

16111

1

2

Relay (24V)Fuse (1.6A)Terminal CoverTerminal CoverTerminal Cover

Terminal CoverB. H. Screw, M3�4BracketBracketB. H. Screw, M3�14

16131

1

2

Item Part No. Description

Mod

el

Qty

16131

1

2

321

1

14

12

321

3

18

12

321

3

18

12

MR

I-11

4

MR

I-12

4

MR

I-13

4

MR

I-21

4

MR

I-22

4

MR

I-23

4

K5031PL03E.EPS

Page 286: 6C2001

CMPL B-6

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E

MRO Relay Output Board

1st Edition Dec.2003-00

1

2 4

3

7

9

11

To Cabinet or Rack

K5031F05E.EPS

1

2

5

6

8

8

7

10

11

K5031F06E.EPS

To Cabinet or Rack

Page 287: 6C2001

CMPL B-7

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 3rd Edition Mar.2005-00Printed in Japan

1

23

45678

91011

S9165VMS9162VMS9163VMA1330EFS9430VK

S9431VKS9380VKS9381VKA1329EFY9304LB

T9056HQT9056HRY9314LB

16

11

1

1

2

Relay (24V)Relay (24V)Relay (24V)Fuse (1.6A)Terminal Cover

Terminal CoverTerminal CoverTerminal CoverFuse (1.0A)B. H. Screw, M3�4

BracketBracketB. H. Screw, M3�14

16

13

1

1

2

Item Part No. Description

Mod

el

Qty

1613

1

1

2

16

1

2

16

1

2

16

1

2

16

1

2

16

12

2

32

1

2

32

1

11

4

12

32

1

31

8

12

321

31

8

12

32

1

2644

12

32

1

2644

12

32

1

22

648

12

MR

O-1

14

MR

O-1

24

MR

O-1

34

MR

O-1

44

MR

O-1

54

MR

O-1

64

MR

O-2

14

MR

O-2

24

MR

O-2

34

MR

O-2

44

MR

O-2

54

MR

O-2

64

K5031PL04E.EPS

Page 288: 6C2001

Blank Page

Page 289: 6C2001

CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

CustomerMaintenanceParts List

CMPL B-9

Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Model ACB41Input/Output Expansion Cabinet(for FIO)

CMPL 33Q06P10-31E

CMPL 33Q06P10-31E1st Edition : Sep. 2001(YK)7th Edition : Jun. 2007(YK)

1

2

2P1031F01E.EPS

1

2�

Note : *1 For suffix code details, refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets. *2 Not included in Model ACB41 (separately order). 2 Panels are necessary when attaching to both sides.

BelowACB41-S1��0*1

ACB41-S2��0*1

ACB41-S30000

ACB2P*2

IM 33Y06K01-90E

1

1or 21

Cabinet UnitFront/Rear : For Node Unit MountingWith Power Distribution Board Unit

Front : For Node Unit. Rear : For 19-inch Rack Equipment MountingWith Power Distribution Board Unit

Front/Rear : For 19-inch Rack Equipmen MountingWithout Power Distribution Board Unit

Side Panel (option)Explosion Protection Manual

Item Model or Part No. DescriptionQty

P1031PL01E.EPS

Page 290: 6C2001

CMPL B-10

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06P10-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

View A

810

9

19

1112

14

13

7

56

4

3

15

17

16

18

20

21

22

A

23

24

24

26

25

28

27

P1031F02J.EPS

2

1

Page 291: 6C2001

CMPL B-11

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06P10-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00

1

2

34567

8

9

101112

13141516

1718192021

222324

25

262728

BelowS9881UKS9884UKS9882UKG9307EM

S9904UKS9691DAS9725VMS9528VKY9306LB

BelowS9887UKS9888UKS9313UKT9080PX

G9311ACY9406LK

BelowS9887UKS9888UK

S9313UKT9080PXG9311ACY9406LKT9080PZ

Y9314LBT9019FFG9307EMT9080QCY9314LB

T9019FFS9594UK

BelowS9422UKS9423UK

G9307EMT9082EYG9307EM

Primary Power Distribution Board Assembly (Front and Rear)For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16

Power Distribution Board Frame AssemblyPrinted Board Assembly

RelayFuse

B.H.Screw,M3�6

Main Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Shaft

WasherB.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly

For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power Supply

For 24V DC Power SupplyShaftWasher

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Dummy Plate

B.H.Screw,M3�14Retainer

Hex.H.Bolt,M5�16Dummy Plate

B.H.Screw,M3�14

RetainerHouse Keeping UnitPower Supply Unit

For 100 to 120V AC and 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply

Models ANB10S, ANB10D, ANS10S, ANS10D, AFF30S, AFF30D, AFF50S or AFF50D (option)*2

BoltDummy Plate (as required)Bolt

2

4

11151

1

1

11

1

11411

112

4�4

Item Part No. Description

Mod

el

Qty

2

4

11151

1

1

111

111

4

1

4�4

1

4

11151

1

1

11

1

11411

112

4�4

1

4

11151

1

1

111

111

4

12

4�4

AC

B41

-S11

*1

AC

B41

-S12

*1

AC

B41

-S21

*1

AC

B41

-S22

*1

Note : *1 ; For suffix code details, refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet. *2 ; Models ANB10S and ANB10D see CMPL 33Q06Q10-31 *2 ; Models ANR10S and ANR10D see CMPL 33Q06Q10-32 *2 ; Models AFF30S and AFF30D see CMPL 33Q06N01-31 *2 ; Models AFF50S and AFF50D see CMPL 33Q06N30-31

P1031PL02E.EPS

Page 292: 6C2001

CMPL B-12

All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06P10-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00Printed in Japan

Door Fan Assembly and Accessory Assembly

11

1312

9

7

6

8

5

P1031F03E.EPS

1

10

P1031PL03E.EPS

1567

89

10

111213

AIP601T9070CB

�Below

S9441DD

S9442DDY9306LBY9408LK

S9090UG

S9362UKS9528VKT9070CB

4221

44

1

112

Fan Unit AssemblyAir FilterFan Frame Assembly

Printed Board AssemblyFor Front Door

For Rear DoorB.H.Screw,M3�6

B.H.Screw with Toothed Lockwasher, M4�8Temperature Sensor Assembly(with front door)

Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter

ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty

Page 293: 6C2001

Ind-1

IM 33Q06C20-01E

CS 1000/CS 3000Field Control Stations

INDEX

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition

AACB21/ACB41 Maintenance Area ................... B3-4Attaching the Brackets on a Nest ..................... A3-5Attaching the Clamp Filters ............................ A4-21

BBattery Unit

FCU .......................................................... A6-20FFCS ........................................................ A6-44PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A6-5Replacement Procedure ........................... A7-19

Bus Cable ConnectionKFCS2/KFCS ........................................... A4-36LFCS2/LFCS ............................................ A4-16PFCS........................................................ A4-10SFCS........................................................ A4-10

CCable Connections .......................................... A4-1Check of Status Indication Lamps

LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ...................... A7-8PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A7-6

Common Procedure for ReplacingCards and Units ................................... A7-24

Configuration ofFCS and Name of Each Part ....................... A2-1FFCS and Name of Each Part ................... A2-13KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet ......................... A2-9LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet .......................... A2-4PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A2-2Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS ................... A2-8Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS .................... A2-3

ConnectingBus Cables ................................................. A4-9Bus Cables to FFCS ................................. A4-42Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCS..................... A4-35Bus Cables to LFCS2/LFCS ..................... A4-15Cable to Contact Output ............................ A4-50ER Bus Cable : FFCS .............................. A4-48ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS ................. A4-39

ESB Bus Cable : FFCS ............................ A4-47ESB Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS.............. A4-37PFCS/SFCS Bus Cable ............................ A4-10RIO Bus Cables ........................................ A4-27V net Cable : FFCS ................................... A4-43

Connection Between V Net Cableand VL Net Cable ................................. A4-11

Contact Output Unit ....................................... A6-33Control Bus Coupler Unit ............................... A6-10Control Bus Coupler Unit

Replacement Procedure ...................... A7-17Control Station Overview ................................. A1-1

DDaily Maintenance ........................................... A7-4

EER Bus

Interface Master Module (EB401) ............. A6-53Interface Slave Module (EB501) ................ A6-54

ESB BusCoupler Module : FFCS ............................ A6-50Coupler Unit : KFCS2/KFCS ..................... A6-30Interface Card : KFCS2/KFCS .................. A6-26Interface Module (SB401) : FFCS ............. A6-51Interface Master Module (with SOE) ......... A6-35

ExchangeBus Cables : FFCS ................................... A7-43Node : FFCS ............................................. A7-53

External Interface UnitFFCS ........................................................ A6-41LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS

with Cabinet ................................... A6-32Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS,

LFCS2/LFCS .................................. A6-31

FFan Units

LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS .................... A6-34Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCS............. A6-2

Page 294: 6C2001

Ind-2

IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

GGrounding ........................................................ A4-6Grounding the RIO Bus .................................. A4-34Grounding the V net ....................................... A4-24

HHow to Replace Parts .................................... A7-57

IInspection by FFCS

Status Display LEDs ................................. A7-11Status Display Window ............................. A7-10

Inspection Using FCS Status DisplayWindow ................................................. A7-5

InstallationNode Inside ACB21/ACB41 ........................ B3-2Wiring : ACB21/ACB41 ............................... B3-3Installation .................................................. A3-1

InstallingACB21/ACB41............................................ B3-5Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS .......... A4-14I/O Extension Rack : PFCS/SFCS .............. A3-9LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS

(with Cabinet) ................................. A3-10Rack Mountable Device .............................. A3-7

IRIG-B Coupler .............................................. A6-39

MMaintenance Area.......................................... A3-11Maintenance of FCS ........................................ A7-1Mounting a Rack Mountable Type Devices ...... A3-2

OOperations and Setups .................................... A5-1Overview of ACB21/ACB41.............................. B3-1

PParts Requiring Periodic Replacement :

FFCS................................................... A7-56Parts Requiring Periodic Replacement :

LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ............... A7-30Parts Requiring Periodic Replacement :

PFCS/SFC .......................................... A7-22Power Distribution Board

LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet ................................... A6-13

PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A6-3Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS,

LFCS2/LFCS .................................. A6-12Power Supply Module : FFCS ........................ A6-42

Power Supply Unit of PFCS/SFCS ................... A6-4Power Supply Unit Replacement

Procedure : PFCS/SFC ....................... A7-13Power Supply Wiring........................................ A4-2Power Unit in FCU : LFCS2/LFCS,

KFCS2/KFCS ...................................... A6-19Precautions for Maintenance ........................... A7-2Precautions for Static Electricity ....................... A7-3Processor Card in FCU .................................. A6-21Processor Card of PFCS/SFCS ....................... A6-6Processor Card Replacement

Procedure : PFCS/SFCS ..................... A7-15Processor Module : FFCS .............................. A6-43

RReplacing

Air Filter : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS..... A7-32Battery ...................................................... A7-59Battery Pack : LFCS2/LFCS,

KFCS2/KFCS ................................. A7-39Battery Unit : PFCS/SFCS ........................ A7-20Cards or Units in Duplexed

LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS ........... A7-27Cards or Units in Non-Redundant

LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFC ............ A7-25Common Modules : FFCS......................... A7-43ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS ... A7-50ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS ..... A7-51ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS ............. A7-48ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS ............ A7-49Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS .... A7-34Fuses : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........ A7-38LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS Parts ........... A7-23PFCS/SFCS Parts .................................... A7-12Processor Module : FFCS ......................... A7-46Relay : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........ A7-41V net Coupler Unit : FFCS......................... A7-52

RIO BusCoupler Unit : LFCS2/LFCS ...................... A6-29Distribution Unit : LFCS2/LFCS ................. A6-18Interface Card : LFCS2/LFCS ................... A6-25

SSetting

Setting Up Units : PFCS/SFCS ................... A5-2the Domain Number : FFCS ...................... A6-47the Domain Number : LFCS2/LFCS,

KFCS2/KFCS ................................. A6-23the Domain Number : PFCS/SFCS ............. A6-8the Station Number : FFCS ....................... A6-48the Station Number :

KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFC ............ A6-24

Page 295: 6C2001

Ind-3

IM 33Q06C20-01E

the Station Number : PFCS/SFCS .............. A6-9IP Address : KFCS2/KFCS ....................... A6-37

TTuring On/Off the Power ................................... A5-5

UUsing the Control bus Converter Unit :

FFCS ................................................... A4-46

VV net

Conversion ............................................... A4-49Coupler Unit : FFCS .................................. A6-49Coupler Unit :

LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS .......... A6-27

WWiring

the Control Bus : PFCS/SFCS .................. A4-12V net Coupler Cable : FFCS ...................... A4-45ACB21/ACB41............................................ B3-6

13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00

Page 296: 6C2001

Blank Page